The hardware structure of model 40 PLCs is entirely modular. A PLC configuration comprises separate elements (empty racks, power supplies, processors, discrete inrack I/O modules, discrete remote I/O modules on the FIPIO bus, intelligent modules, etc).

PLC base Remote I/O extension in rack

TBX remote I/O modules on FIPIO bus

Direct discrete I/O extension

Local I/O extension in rack

FIPIO bus

Direct discrete I/O extension

___________________________________________________________________________

1/2

Introduction to model 40 PLCs 1

_______________________________________________________________________________________

1.1-2 PLC base

A PLC base is assembled from the following parts :

1 An empty basic rack

A power supply module

3 A processor module

4 Discrete I/O modules

5 Analog and counting modules

Fiber optic and/or electrical remote modules

7 Intelligent modules.

2 1

3 4 5 6 7

The number of in-rack and/or remote I/O controlled by the FIPIO bus depends on the type of processor being used (see processor characteristics in divider A - section 2)

____________________________________________________________________

1.1-3 Direct I/O extensions

This rack can extend the PLC base or a local (or remote) I/O extension by 7 or 8 additional slots.

It is composed of :

An empty rack equipped with :

• a connecting cable

• covers.

2 Discrete I/O modules

3 Analog and counting modules

(TSX ADT../AST../AXT..).

2 3

The PLC base with its direct I/O extension is called the basic configuration.

___________________________________________________________________________

1/3

_______________________________________________________________________________________

1.1-4 Local and remote I/O Extensions

These racks connect to the PLC base. Each local or remote I/O rack can have its own direct I/O extension rack.

They are composed of :

1 An empty rack

A power supply module

3 A local rackmaster module or fiber optic/ electrical daisy-chaining module for remote extensions.

4 Discrete I/O modules

5 Analog or counting modules

Intelligent modules (except network modules) if the rack is equipped with a complete I/O bus.

2 1

Two types of extensions can be assembled :

Local I/O extensions

The racks can be daisy-chained from the processor in the PLC base via a high transmission speed serial link.

The maximum total length of the cables between the processor and the last extension rack must not exceed 30 metres.

PLC base.

Direct I/O extension.

Local I/O extension.

3 3

4 5

___________________________________________________________________________

1/4

Introduction to model 40 PLCs 1

_______________________________________________________________________________________

Remote I/O extensions

Remote I/O extensions enable various types of module : discrete I/O, analog and counting, and intelligent modules to be located at some distance from the PLC base.

Two types of technology can be used :

• Remote operation via fiber optic bus : maximum cable length 2000 metres (1)

Basic config.

Remote ext.

C C C C

B B B B B a b b b c

Maximum distances a : Between the PLC base and the extension : 1000 metres (1).

b : Between 2 extensions : 1000 metres (1).

c : Between the PLC base and the last extension : 2000 metres (1).

• Remote operation via electrical bus : maximum cable length 500 metres

Basic config.

C C

Remote ext.

Maximum 500 metres

Remote ext.

Maximum distance between the PLC base and the last extension : 500 metres.

In certain cases this distance must be limited to 400 metres (see section 8.4-5 Divider

A).

A PLC base.

Direct I/O extension.

Remote I/O extension.

_________

(1) The maximum distance for remote operation depends on the type of fiber used (see characteristics of the fiber optic bus for remote operation, sections 8.3-4 - divider A).

___________________________________________________________________________

1/5

_______________________________________________________________________________________

1.1-5 TBX remote I/O on FIPIO bus

Remote TBX I/O are connected via the FIPIO fieldbus run by the processor in the PLC base, and are limited by the number of connection points supported by the processor.

There are two families of remote TBX I/O :

1 Modular TBX I/O

Monobloc TBX I/O

As the maximum length of a FIPIO bus segment is 1000 metres, this is the maximum distance at which the device which is the farthest away can be operated remotely from the PLC base. However with the use of repeaters (electrical or fiber optic) this distance can be increased to 5000 metres.

Characteristics and setup of TBX I/O and the FIPIO bus are described in more detail in the following manuals : setup manual for remote TBX I/O :

TXT DM TBX T V5E setup manual for FIPWAY/FIPIO integrated port :

TXT DM FPP V5E.

___________________________________________________________________________

1/6

________________________________________________________

Processors Section 2

___________________________________________________________________________

2.1

General presentation

________________________________________________________________________________________

2.2

Version V5 processors for TSX and PMX 7 model 40 PLCs 2/15

Page

___________________________________________________________________________________

2.3

Version V4 processors for TSX and PMX 7 model 40 PLCs 2/24

________________________________________________________________________________________

2.4

Processor compatibility 2/32

2.4-2 Compatibility between version V5 processors

2/32

___________________________________________________________________________

2/1

________________________________________________________

Processors Section 2

___________________________________________________________________________

2.5

Integrated UNI-TELWAY link

Page

2/33

2/34

____________________________________________________________________________________

2.6

Integrated FIPWAY port 2/36

2/36

2/38

2/39

____________________________________________________________________________________

2.7

Appendix 2/40

2.7-1 PID characteristics of TPMX P ●● processors 2/40

___________________________________________________________________________

2/2

Processors 2

_______________________________________________________________________________________

2.1-1 General

Two families of processor can be used :

• TSX P••+++ processors for installation in TSX 7 multifunction PLCs,

PLCs Version V4 processors Version V5 processors

TSX 47 40 TSX P47 400 TSX P47 405

TSX P47 410 TSX P47 415

TSX P47 411 TSX P47 425

TSX P47 420 TSX P47 455

TSX 67 40 TSX P67 410 TSX P67 425

TSX P47 420 TSX P67 455

TSX 87 40 TSX P87 410 TSX P87 425

TSX P87 420 TSX P87 455

TSX 107 40 TSX P107 410 TSX P107 425

TSX P107 420 TSX P107 455

• TPMX P••+++ processors for installation in PMX 7 multifunction PLCs with PID control.

PLCs Version V4 processors Version V5 processors

PMX 47 40 TPMX P47 420 TPMX P47 425

TPMX P47 455

PMX 67 40 TPMX P67 420 TPMX P67 425

TPMX P67 455

PMX 87 40 TPMX P87 420 TPMX P87 425

TPMX P87 455

PMX 107 40 TPMX P107 420 TPMX P107 425

TPMX P107 455

___________________________________________________________________________

2/3

_______________________________________________________________________________________

These processors have an internal RAM memory which can receive the whole of the application. This memory is backed up by a battery which will protect the data for up to

5 weeks. They allow on-line modification of the program, are equipped with a batterybacked real-time clock and can be connected on FIPWAY (1), TELWAY (2), MAPWAY and ETHWAY (3) networks.

Integrated as standard within some processors is :

● a UNI-TELWAY port

- version V4 processors : TSX P47 411 and TSX or TPMX P••420

- version V5 processors : TSX or TPMX P••425.

● or a FIP link (only version V5 processors) :

- TSX P47 415 and TSX or TPMX P•• 455).

If no remote TBX I/O have been configured, this port operates on FIPWAY network by default. Otherwise, the link operates on a FIPIO I/O bus. These two modes of operation are mutually exclusive.

All Model 40 processors can be programmed in PL7-3 languages (Ladder language,

Grafcet and Literal) by means of the X-TEL or MINI X-TEL Software Workshop.

PL7-3 software provides :

●

A multitask structure including : master task, fast task, interrupt and auxiliary tasks

●

Modular and symbolic programming

●

The integration of optional function blocks, designed to simplify the programming of intelligent modules

●

The opportunity to modify programs during execution

● etc.

_________

(1) only for TSX P47 415 and TSX or PMX P•• 455 processors.

(2) for all processors.

(3) from TSX or TPMX P47 420 and TSX or TPMX P47 425 processors onwards.

___________________________________________________________________________

2/4

Processors 2

_______________________________________________________________________________________

2.1-2 Physical appearance

Each processor is a module which occupies one slot in the basic PLC rack.

Description of front panel

1 A slot for receiving a user memory cartridge (battery-backed RAM or

EPROM). Depending on the type of processor, this cartridge can have a capacity of 32 to 256 K words of 16 bits.

2 Terminal programming port (20 ma current loop).

3 A RUN lamp (green) : lit if the processor is working (running the program).

4 A CPU lamp (red) : lit if the processor is malfunctioning

(processor fault).

5 A MEM lamp (red) : lit if there is a user memory fault.

6 An I/O lamp (red) : lit if there is an I/O fault.

TSX .. 40

RUN

CPU

MEM

I/O

UTW

7 A UTW or FIP lamp (red) : only on processors with integrated UNI-TELWAY or

FIPWAY port.

● labelled UTW for processors equipped with an integrated UNI-TELWAY port :

- version V4 processors : TSX P47 411 and TSX or TPMX P••420

- version V5 processors : TSX or TPMX P••425

This lamp is lit if the port is not participating in the exchanges.

● labelled FIP for processors equipped with an integrated FIPWAY port :

- version V5 processors : TSX P47 415 and TSX or TPMXP•• 455.

In this case, the lamp is :

- lit when the FIPWAY segment cannot be used

- blinking if the operating mode is not adequate for the required function.

8 A connector for receiving local or remote in-rack extensions. This connector is not present in TSX P47 400/405 processors.

This connector can also be used for connection to :

• a UNI-TELWAY bus for processors equipped with a UNI-TELWAY integrated port :

- version V4 processors : TSX P47 411 and TSX or TPMXP•• 420

- version V5 processors : TSX or TPMX P••425.

• the FIPWAY network or FIPIO bus for processors equipped with the FIP port :

- version V5 processors : TSX P47 415 and TSX or TPMX P••455.

___________________________________________________________________________

2/5

_______________________________________________________________________________________

2.1-3 Installation

The processor must be installed in the basic PLC rack in the slot marked M to the right of the power supply module.

The locating devices on the backplane of the rack must be set to the code corresponding to the type of processor.

Code numbers for TSX P

●● ●●● processors

Version V4 processors

TSX P47 400

TSX P47 410

TSX P47 411

TSX P47 420

TSX P67 410

TSX P67 420

TSX P87 410

TSX P87 420

TSX P107 410

TSX P107 420

987

993

994

995

996

Code numbers

980

981

969

982

986

Version V5 processors

TSX P47 405

TSX P47 415

TSX P47 425

TSX P47 455

TSX P67 425

TSX P67 455

TSX P87 425

TSX P87 455

TSX P107 425

TSX P107 455

Code numbers for TPMX P

●● ●●●

processors

Version V4 processors

TPMX P47 420

Code numbers

963

TPMX P67 420

TPMX P87 420

TPMX P107 420

964

965

966

Version V5 processors

TPMX P47 425

TPMX P47 455

TPMX P67 425

TPMX P67 455

TPMX P87 425

TPMX P87 455

TPMX P107 425

TPMX P107 455

949

951

952

953

954

Code numbers

944

945

946

947

948

Code numbers

955

956

957

958

959

960

961

962

___________________________________________________________________________

2/6

Processors 2

_______________________________________________________________________________________

2.1-4 Internal processor structure

TURBO memory

BICOM

UNI-TELWAY port

FIP port

FIPWAY

FIPIO

Numerical processor

Boolean processor and sequencer

System memory

Application memory

Internal

RAM memory

(words)

Arithmetic coprocessor

Internal

RAM memory

(bits)

Memory cartridge

Real-time clock

Pre-processing processor

Parallel bus interface

Terminal

Serial bus interface for local or remote extensions

These function do not exist on all processors

TURBO memory : only on TSX or TPMX P107... processors

BICOM :

Serial bus interface :

UNI-TELWAY port : only on TSX or TPMX P67.../P87.../P107... processors not on TSX P47 400/405 processors only on TSX P47 411 and TSX or TPMX P..420/425 processors

FIP port : only on TSX P47 415 and TSX or TPMX P..455 processors

Arithmetic coprocessor : only on TPMX P.. ..5 processors

___________________________________________________________________________

2/7

_______________________________________________________________________________________

2.1-5 Functions

Boolean processor

This is a wired microprogrammed processor integrated in a gate array.

It is autonomous and comprises the necessary circuits for calculations and access to instructions stored in the application memory.

This enables it to execute the user program instruction code together with its Boolean processing.

Numerical processor

This is based on a 16 or 32 bit microprocessor depending on the type of processor and controls :

● the system tasks, whilst also executing the instructions on both words and function blocks,

● the front panel indicator lamps.

Version V5 Microprocessor processors

TSX P47 405415 8086 to 12 MHz

TSX P47 425455

TSX P67 425/455 80386 SX to 16 MHz

TSX P87 425/455 80386 SX to 25 MHz

TSX P107 425/455 80386 DX to 33 MHz

TPMX P47 425/455 8086 to 8 MHz

TPMX P67 425/455 80386 SX to 16 MHz

TPMX P87 425/455 80386 SX to 25 MHz

TPMX P107 425/455 80386 DX to 33 MHz

Processors Microprocessor version V4

TSX P47 400410 8086 to 8 MHz

TSX P47 411/420

TSX P67 410/420 8086 to 8 MHz

TSX P87 410/420 80386 SX to 16 MHz

TSX P107 410/420 80386 DX to 25 MHz

TPMX P47 420 8086 to 8 MHz

TPMX P67 420 8086 to 8 MHz

TPMX P87 420 80386 SX to 16 MHz

TPMX P107 420 80386 DX to 25 MHz

Arithmetical coprocessor

This is based on a 16 or 32 bit microprocessor depending on the type of processor. It is only fitted on version V5 TPMX P•• 4•5 PID-type processors, and is used for floatingpoint calculations.

Version V5 Microprocessor processors

TPMX P47 425/455 8087 to 8 MHz

TPMX P67 425/455 80387 SX to 16 MHz

TPMX P87 425/455 80387 SX to 25 MHz

TPMX P107 425/455 80387 DX to 33 MHz

___________________________________________________________________________

2/8

Processors 2

_______________________________________________________________________________________

Pre-processing processor

This is based on an 8-bit 80C52 microprocessor and executes the following operations :

●

It performs exchanges with the terminal and prepares incoming or outgoing messages for it before they are processed by the numerical processor.

●

It controls the various service and alarm signals and monitors correct operation of the numerical processor. It is itself monitored by the gate array in which the Boolean processor and the sequencer are integrated.

Sequencer

This is integrated in the same gate array as the Boolean processor. At the request of the numerical processor, it controls exchanges with the I/O modules, and also performs exchanges with the bit memory.

System memory

This EPROM memory is assigned to the internal operating system of the processor and defines its functions. It is written by Telemecanique and is not accessible to the user.

Application memory

This comprises :

●

An internal RAM memory (bits). This is a 4K bit RAM memory (4096 bits) which

● contains the image of all the bit objects bits except the module fault bits. It is the "data" memory of the Boolean processor.

An internal RAM memory (words) which can be extended by a user memory cartridge.

- Internal RAM Memory (words)

With a capacity of 24 to 96 K words (16 bits) depending on the processor, this memory stores : data relating to the PL7-3 program and to the programs of the intelligent modules programs and constants relating to the PL7-3 program and to the programs of the intelligent modules.

- User Memory Cartridge

This is used to extend the internal RAM memory (words).

With a capacity of 32 to 256 K words (16 bits), this removable memory is fitted to the

PLC processor.

Two types of cartridge are available :

RAM Memory Cartridge, battery-backed (5 weeks), in 32/64/128/256 K word modules.

EPROM Memory Cartridge, in 32/64/128/256 K word modules.

TURBO memory

This contains a copy of the system memory which enables the numerical processor to search for its instructions without waiting.

It exists only in :

●

Version V4 processors : TSX P107 410/420 or TPMX P107 420

Version V5 processors : TSX or TPMX P107 425/455.

___________________________________________________________________________

2/9

_______________________________________________________________________________________

BICOM

This is a gate array which gives the numerical processor faster access to the application and system memories.

It only exists on TSX or TPMX P67 4••/ P87 4••/P107 4•• processors.

Real-time clock

The real-time clock is integrated in the processor and backed up by a battery. It provides the following information which is contained in system words SW51 to SW57 :

SW51 seconds : 0 to 59

SW52 minutes : 0 to 59

SW53 hours : 0 to 23

SW54 days of the month : 1 to 31

SW55 month : 1 to 12

SW56 years : 0 to 99

SW57 days of the week : 1 to 7

(For operation, see Divider A, sub-section 2.1-8)

UNI-TELWAY link

Integrated in some processors, this facility avoids the need to install a UNI-TELWAY module in order to connect a UNI-TELWAY bus to the PLC (see Divider A, Section 2.6).

●

Version V4 processors : TSX P47 411 and TSX or TPMX P•• 420.

●

Version V5 processors : TSX or TPMX P•• 425.

FIPWAY link

Version V5 processors : TSX P47 415 and TSX or TPMX P••

●

FIPWAY link as standard which can operate :

● on a FIPWAY network (default operation),

● on a FIPIO I/O bus.

These types of operation are mutually exclusive.

Parallel I/O bus interface

This is fitted in the basic PLC rack and in the associated direct extension rack.

Serial bus interface for I/O extensions

This interface is used to extend the I/O bus in the basic PLC rack to :

●

The local extension racks through the TSX LES 20 local rackmaster module.

●

The remote extension racks through :

- the TSX LFS 120 or 121 remote module and the TSX LFS 200 or 201 daisy-chaining module if the remote extension is via a fiber optic connection

- the TSX LES 120 remote module and the TSX LES 200 if the remote extension is via an electrical connection.

This interface is not present in TSX P47 400/405 processors.

Type : RS 422 serial link

Speed : 2 Mega bauds on TSX or TPMX P47 4•• /P67 4••/P87 4••/P107 4••

3 Mega bauds on TSX or TPMX P107 4••

___________________________________________________________________________

2/10

Processors 2

_______________________________________________________________________________________

2.1-6 Application memory

Characteristics

The application memory of the Model 40 processors can be divided into two parts :

First part : Internal RAM Memory

The internal RAM memory, which is integrated in the PLC processor, can receive the whole of the PLC application. It is backed up by a battery (5 weeks) and itself comprises two zones :

●

The bit memory : capacity of 4K bits (4096 bits). This memory contains the image of all bit objects :

- System bits : 128 bits

- Discrete I/O bits : (1)

- Grafcet steps : 512 bits

- Grafcet macro-steps : 64 bits

- Internal bits : up to the limit of the remaining memory space

●

The word memory : capacity 24 to 96 K words (16 bits) depending on the type of processor. This memory stores :

- The data relating to the PL7-3 program and the programs of the intelligent modules

- The programs and constants relating to the PL7-3 programs and the programs of the intelligent modules.

This word memory can be extended by a user memory cartridge.

Version V4 and V5 Word memory

TSX and TPMX processors capacity

TSX P47 400/405 24 K words

TSX P47 410/411/420/415/425/455 and TPMX P47 420/425/455 48 K words

TSX P67 410/420/425/455 and TPMX P67 420/425/455

TSX P87 410/420/425/455 and TPMX P87 420/425/455 96 K words

TSX P107 410/420/425/455 and TPMX P107 420/425/455

Second part : User Memory Cartridge

This removable memory, fitted in the processor, can be used to extend the internal RAM memory (words). Two types of cartridge are available :

●

Battery-backed RAM memory cartridge

Modules of : 32/64/128/256 K words (16 bits)

●

EPROM memory cartridge

Modules of : 32/64/128/256 K words (16 bits)

These cartridges are described in sub-section 2.1-7 of this divider.

_________

(1) depending on the type of processor :

512 for TSX P47 400/405

1024 for TSX P47 410/411/420/415/425/455 or TPMX P47 420/425/455

2048 for TSX or TPMX P67 4•• / P87 4••/ P107 4••

___________________________________________________________________________

2/11

_______________________________________________________________________________________

Version V4 and V5

TSX and TPMX processors

TSX P47 400/405

TSX P47 410/411/420/415/425/455 and TPMX P47 420/425/455

TSX P67 410/420/425/455 and TPMX P67 420/425/455

TSX P87 410/420/425/455 and TPMX P87 420/425/455

TSX P107 410/420/425/455 and TPMX P107 420/425/455

User memory capacity

32 K words

32/64 K words

64/128 K words

64/128/256 K words

The user can choose one of the 3 following solutions, as required : internal

RAM

DATA

PROGRAMS

CONSTANTS internal

RAM

DATA internal

RAM

DATA

PROGRAMS

RAM cartridge

CONSTANTS

EPROM cartridge

CONSTANTS

Structure

The application memory is structured so as to ensure the independence of the various functions controlled by a PLC :

●

Sequential control (PL7-3 program)

Axis control (PL7-AXE program)

Communication (PL7-COM program)

Analog and PID control (PL7-PCL and PL7-PMS/PMS2 programs)

Networks (PL7-NET program)

Etc.

The application memory structure thus enables independent memory zones to be reserved for each function.

This structure is defined automatically under the X-TEL or MINI X-TEL Software

Workshop by means of the following tools :

●

XTEL-CONF for a TSXV5 or PMXV5 type station

●

XTEL-MEM for a TSXV4 or PMXV4 type station

(use of both these tools is outlined in the TXT DM TLS V5E manual)

___________________________________________________________________________

2/12

Processors 2

_______________________________________________________________________________________

2.1-7 User memory cartridge

Description

This removable cartridge, installed in the processor comprises :

1 A colour-coded extractor tab :

Red for a RAM memory

Black for an EPROM memory

4 3 1

2 An opaque sliding panel to protect the

EPROM memories

3 A locating device

4 An identification label

Two types of memory can be used :

Battery-backed RAM memory : read/write memory used for program creation and debugging. It is backed up by a battery when the cartridge is powered down (5 weeks max).

It can be loaded from a terminal, on-line or from the TSX TPE 020 1 cartridge programmer.

EPROM memory : read-only memory used once the program has been debugged.

It can loaded from a terminal or by the TSX TPE 020 1 cartridge programmer.

EPROM memory cartridges must be completely erased in the TSX EPE 1 or 2 ultraviolet eraser before they can be rewritten.

RAM cartridges

References

TSX RAM 32 16

TSX RAM 64 16

TSX RAM 128 16

TSX RAM 256 16

Capacity

32 K words

64 K words

128 K words

256 K words

EPROM cartridges

References

TSX RPM 32 16

TSX RPM 64 16

TSX RPM 128 16

TSX RPM 256 16

Capacity

32 K words

64 K words

128 K words

256 K words

___________________________________________________________________________

2/13

_______________________________________________________________________________________

2.1-8 Real-time clock

Current date and time

The system automatically updates the current date and time in system words SW50 to

SW57.

SW50

SW51

SW52

SW53

SW54

SW55

SW56

SW57 word always at 0 seconds minutes hours days of the month : 1 to 31 month years days of the week

0 to 59

: 0 to 59

: 0 to 23

1 to 12

0 to 99

1 to 7

Access to the date and time :

- By using the XTEL-CONTROL tool

- By reading system words SW51 to SW57 if system bits SY49 = 0 and SY50 = 0

(SY49 and SY50 are at 0 by default).

Resetting the date and time :

- By using the XTEL-CONTROL tool

- By writing system words SW51 to SW57 if system bits SY49 = 0 and SY50 = 1.

Date and time of last stop

By using the XTEL-CONTROL tool

By reading system bits SW51 to SW56 if system bits SY49 = 1 and SY50 = 0.

System word SW57 indicates the cause of the stoppage :

SW57 = 1 STOP command from the terminal

SW57 = 2 software fault (task or Grafcet overrun)

SW57 = 4 power break or opening of the cartridge lock

SW57 = 5 hardware fault

SW57 = 6 stopped by a HALT instruction.

Drift of the clock : less than 4 seconds per day within the temperature range.

___________________________________________________________________________

2/14

Processors 2

_______________________________________________________________________________________

2.2 Version V5 processors for TSX and PMX7 model 40 PLCs

2.2-1 TSX P47 405 processor

The TSX P47 405 processor can only control the following types of module :

●

Rack-mounted discrete I/O interface (4/8/16/32 bits)

Analog I/O interface (TSX ADT 201/202/203/AST 200)

Counting and positioning interface (TSX AXT 200).

TSX 47 40

RUN

CPU

MEM

I/O

It also enables the PLC to be integrated into a singlenetwork TELWAY structure.

It supports the PL7-3 programming language (Ladder,

Grafcet and Literal).

Principal characteristics

Processor

Functions

Memory

No. of rack-mounted discrete I/O

No. of modules (1)

No. of network connections

Integrated FIPIO/FIPWAY

Integrated UNI-TELWAY

Rack-mounted TELWAY

TSX P47 405

512

1 no no yes network module MAPWAY/ETHWAY no

Max memory size 56 K words

Internal RAM

User cartridge

Bit instructions

Arithmetic operations

24 K words

32 K words

0.32 µs

15.8 µs

Instruction execution times

Max size

Logic operations

No. of slots

No. of racks

No. of FIPIO connections

Integration into non fan-cooled racks (2)

Tasks Master

Interrupt

Fast

Auxiliary

11.8 µs

TSX RKN 82 / 82W11 / 52

__________________

(1) excluding rack-mounted TELWAY network modules.

(2) integration into fan-cooled racks also possible.

___________________________________________________________________________

2/15

_______________________________________________________________________________________

2.2-2 TSX P47 415 / P47 425 / P47 455 processors

TSX P47 415/425/455 processors can control the following types of module :

●

Rack-mounted discrete I/O (4/8/16/32 bits)

●

Remote discrete I/O on FIPIO bus (excluding TSX

P47 425)

TSX 47 40

●

Analog I/O interface (TSX ADT 201/202/203/AST 200)

Counting and positioning interface (TSX AXT 200)

Intelligent modules.

RUN

CPU

MEM

I/O

They also enable the PLC to be integrated into a singlenetwork (TSX P47 415) or multi-network (TSX P47

425/455) structure.

They support the PL7-3 programming language (Ladder,

Grafcet and Literal).

Principal characteristics

Processors and/or remote on a FIPIO bus)

No. of modules (1)

TSX P47 415 TSX P47 425 TSX P47 455

Functions No. of discrete I/O (in racks 1024

1024

No. of network connections 1

Integrated FIPIO/FIPWAY yes

Integrated UNI-TELWAY

Rack-mounted TELWAY no yes

1 no yes yes

1 yes no yes

Memory network module

MAPWAY

ETHWAY

Max memory size

Internal RAM

User cartridge

Bit instructions

Arithmetic operations

Logic operations no no

112 K words

48 K words

0.32 µs

15.8 µs

11.8 µs yes yes

112 K words

48 K words

32/64 K words 32/64 K words 32/64 K words

0.32 µs

15.8 µs

11.8 µs yes yes

112 K words

48 K words

0.32 µs

15.8 µs

11.8 µs

Max size 48

No. of FIPIO connections 32 0

Integration into non fan-cooled racks (2) TSX RKN 82 / 82W11 / 52

Tasks

No. of slots

No. of racks

Master

Interrupt

Fast

Auxiliary

__________________

( 1) excluding rack-mounted (TELWAY, MAPWAY, ETHWAY) and integrated network modules (FIPWAY).

2/16

Processors 2

_______________________________________________________________________________________

2.2-3 TSX P67 425/P67 455 processors

TSX P67 425/455 processors can control the following types of module :

●

Rack-mounted discrete I/O (4/8/16/32 bits)

●

Remote discrete I/O on FIPIO bus (excluding TSX

P67 425)

●

Analog I/O interface (TSX ADT 201/202/203/AST 200)

Counting and positioning interface (TSX AXT 200)

Intelligent couplers.

TSX 47 40

RUN

CPU

MEM

I/O

UTW

They also enable the PLC to be integrated into a multinetwork structure.

They support the PL7-3 programming language (Ladder,

Grafcet and Literal).

Principal characteristics

Processors

Functions No. of discrete I/O (in racks and/or remote on FIPIO bus)

No. of modules (1)

Memory

No. of network connections

Integrated FIPIO/FIPWAY

TSX P67 425

2048

2 no

Integrated UNI-TELWAY

TELWAY

Rack-mounted network module MAPWAY/ETHWAY yes yes yes

Max memory size 224 K words

Instruction execution times

Internal RAM

User cartridge

Bit instructions

Arithmetic operations

Max size

Logic operations

No. of slots

No. of racks

No. of FIPIO connections

Integration into fan-cooled racks

Tasks Master

Interrupt

Fast

Auxiliary

96 K words

64 /128 K words

0.5 µs

10 µs

9 µs

112

TSX RKN 82F / 82FD

TSX RKN 82FW11 / 82FDW11

1 1

TSX P67 455

2048

2 yes no yes yes

224 K words

96 K words

64 /128 K words

0.5 µs

10 µs

9 µs

112

_________

2/17

_______________________________________________________________________________________

2.2-4 TSX P87 425/P87 455 processors

TSX P87 425/455 processors can control the following types of module :

●

Rack-mounted discrete I/O (4/8/16/32 bits)

●

Remote discrete I/O on FIPIO bus (excluding TSX

P87 425)

●

Analog I/O interface (TSX ADT 201/202/203/AST 200)

Counting and positioning interface (TSX AXT 200)

Intelligent couplers.

They also enable the PLC to be integrated into a multinetwork structure.

TSX 87 40

RUN

CPU

MEM

I/O

UTW

They support the PL7-3 programming language (Ladder,

Grafcet and Literal).

Principal characteristics

Processors

Functions No. of discrete I/O (in racks and/or remote FIPIO bus)

Memory

No. of modules (1)

No. of network connections

Max memory size

Internal RAM

User cartridge

Bit instructions

Integrated FIPIO/FIPWAY

Integrated UNI-TELWAY

Rack-mounted network module

TELWAY no yes yes

MAPWAY/ETHWAY yes

4 yes no

352 K words

96 K words yes yes

352 K words

96 K words

64/128/256K words 64/128/256K words

0.32 µs 0.32 µs Instruction execution times

TSX P87 425

2048

TSX P87 455

2048

Max size

Arithmetic operations

Logic operations

No. of slots

No. of racks

7.6 µs

6.6 µs

112

7.6 µs

6.6 µs

112

No. of FIPIO connections

Integration into fan-cooled racks

Tasks Master

Interrupt

Fast

Auxiliary

0 64

TSX RKN 82F / 82FD

TSX RKN 82FW11 / 82FDW11

_________

2/18

Processors 2

_______________________________________________________________________________________

2.2-5 TSX P107 425/P107 455 processors

TSX P107 425/455 processors can control the following types of module :

●

Rack-mounted discrete I/O (4/8/16/32 bits)

●

Remote discrete I/O on FIPIO bus (excluding

TSX P107 425)

●

Analog I/O interface (TSX ADT 201/202/203/AST 200)

Counting and positioning interface (TSX AXT 200)

Intelligent couplers.

They also enable the PLC to be integrated into a multinetwork structure.

TSX 107 40

RUN

CPU

MEM

I/O

UTW

They support the PL7-3 programming language (Ladder,

Grafcet and Literal).

Principal characteristics

Processors

Functions No. of discrete I/O (in racks and/or remote on FIPIO bus)

Memory

Instruction execution times

Max size

No. of modules (1)

No. of network connections

Max memory size

Internal RAM

User cartridge

Bit instructions

Integrated FIPIO/FIPWAY

Integrated UNI-TELWAY

Rack-mounted network module

TELWAY no yes yes

MAPWAY/ETHWAY yes

4 yes no

352 K words

96 K words yes yes

352 K words

96 K words

64/128/256K words 64/128/256K words

0.32 µs 0.32 µs

Arithmetic operations

Logic operations

No. of slots

No. of racks

TSX P107 425

2048

4.9 µs

3.9 µs

112

TSX P107 455

2048

4.9 µs

3.9 µs

112

No. of FIPIO connections

Integration into ventilated racks

Tasks Master

Interrupt

Fast

Auxiliary

0 64

TSX RKN 82F / 82FD

TSX RKN 82FW11 / 82FDW11

_________

2/19

_______________________________________________________________________________________

2.2-6 TPMX P47 425/P47 455 processors

TPMX P47 425/455 processors can control the following types of module :

●

Rack-mounted discrete I/O (4/8/16/32 bits)

Remote discrete I/O on FIPIO bus (excluding

●

TPMX P47 425)

Analog I/O Interface (TSX ADT 201/202/203/AST 200), counting and positioning interface (TSX AXT 200)

Intelligent couplers.

They also enable the PLC to be integrated into a singlenetwork structure.

These processors, which can be programmed in PL7-3 language, are capable of processing PID control functions at the same time as sequential control and allow floating point calculation.

TSX 87 40

RUN

UTW

CPU

MEM

I/O

Principal characteristics

Processors

Functions No. of discrete I/O (in racks and/or remote on FIPIO bus)

No. of modules (1)

No. of network connections

Integrated FIPIO/FIPWAY

TPMX P47 425

1024

1 no

Integrated UNI-TELWAY

Rack-mounted network module

TELWAY

MAPWAY/ETHWAY yes yes yes

PID control (see characteristics in appendix section 2-7 in this divider)

Memory Max memory size

Internal RAM

User cartridge

Bit instructions

112 K words

48 K words

32 /64 K words

0.5 µs

Instruction execution times

Max size

Arithmetic operations

Logic operations

Floating point operations

No. of slots

No. of racks

No. of FIPIO connections

20.1 µs

13.1 µs

118.1 µs

112

TPMX P47 455

1024

1 yes no yes yes

112 K words

48 K words

32 /64 K words

0.5 µs

20.1 µs

13.1 µs

118.1 µs

112

Integration into non fan-cooled racks (2)

Tasks (3) Auxiliary

TSX RKN 82 / 82W11 / 52

2 2

_________

(1) excluding rack-mounted (TELWAY, MAPWAY, ETHWAY) and integrated (FIPWAY) network modules.

(2) integration into fan-cooled racks also possible.

(3) 1 master task, 1 fast task, 1 interrupt task.

___________________________________________________________________________

2/20

Processors 2

_______________________________________________________________________________________

2.2-7 TPMX P67 425/P67 455 processors

TPMX P67 425/455 processors can control the following types of module :

●

Rack-mounted discrete I/O (4/8/16/32 bits)

Remote discrete I/O on FIPIO bus (excluding

●

TPMX P67 425)

Analog I/O interface (TSX ADT 201/202/203/AST 200), counting and positioning interface modules (TSX AXT 200)

Intelligent modules.

They also enable the PLC to be integrated into a multinetwork structure.

These processors, which can be programmed in PL7-3 language, are capable of processing PID control functions at the same time as sequential control and allow floating point calculation.

TSX 87 40

RUN

CPU

MEM

I/O

UTW

Principal characteristics

Processors

Functions No. of discrete I/O (in racks and/or remote on FIPIO bus)

No. of modules (1)

No. of network connections

Integrated FIPIO/FIPWAY

TPMX P67 425

2048

2 no

TPMX P67 455

2048

2 yes

Integrated UNI-TELWAY

Rack-mounted network module

TELWAY

MAPWAY/ETHWAY yes yes yes

PID control (see characteristics in appendix section 2-7 in this divider)

Memory Max memory size

Internal RAM

User cartridge

Bit instructions no yes yes

224 K words

96K words

224 K words

96 K words

64 / 128 K words 64 / 128 K words

0.50 µs 0.50 µs

Instruction execution times

Max size

Arithmetic operations

Logic operations

Floating point operations

No. of slots

No. of racks

No. of FIPIO connections

10 µs

9 µs

48.9 µs

112

10 µs

9 µs

48.9 µs

112

Integration into fan-cooled racks TSX RKN 82F / 82FD

TSX RKN 82FW11 / 82FDW11

4 4 Tasks (2) Auxiliary

_________

(1) excluding rack-mounted (TELWAY, MAPWAY, ETHWAY) and integrated (FIPWAY) network modules.

(2) 1 master task, 1 fast task, 1 interrupt task.

___________________________________________________________________________

2/21

_______________________________________________________________________________________

2.2-8 TPMX P87 425/P87 455 processors

TPMX P87 425/455 processors can control the following types of module :

●

Rack-mounted discrete I/O (4/8/16/32 bits)

●

Remote discrete I/O on FIPIO bus (excluding

TPMX P87 425)

●

Analog I/O interface (TSX ADT 201/202/203/AST 200) counting and positioning interface (TSX AXT 200)

●

Intelligent modules.

They also enable the PLC to be integrated into a singlenetwork structure.

These processors, which can be programmed in PL7-3 language, are capable of processing PID control functions at the same time as sequential control and allow floating point calculation.

Principal characteristics

TSX 87 40

RUN

CPU

MEM

I/O

UTW

Processors

Functions No. of discrete I/O (in racks and/or remote on FIPIO bus)

No. of modules (1)

No. of network connections

Integrated FIPIO/FIPWAY

TPMX P87 425

2048

4 no

TPMX P87 455

2048

4 yes

Integrated UNI-TELWAY

Rack-mounted network module

TELWAY

MAPWAY/ETHWAY yes yes yes

PID control (see characteristics in appendix section 2-7 in this divider)

Memory Max memory size

Internal RAM

User cartridge

Bit instructions no yes yes

352 K words

96K words

352 K words

96 K words

64/128/256 K words 64/128/256 K words

0.32 µs 0.32 µs

Instruction execution times

Max size

Arithmetic operations

Logic operations

Floating point operations

No. of slots

No. of racks

No. of FIPIO connections

7.6 µs

6.6 µs

39.6 µs

112

7.6 µs

6.6 µs

39.6 µs

112

Integration into fan-cooled racks TSX RKN 82F / 82FD

TSX RKN 82FW11 / 82FDW11

4 4 Tasks (2) Auxiliary

_________

(1) excluding rack-mounted (TELWAY, MAPWAY, ETHWAY) and integrated (FIPWAY) network modules.

(2) 1 master task, 1 fast task, 1 interrupt task.

___________________________________________________________________________

2/22

Processors 2

_______________________________________________________________________________________

2.2-9 TPMX P107 425/P107 455 processors

TPMX P107 425/455 processors can control the following types of module :

●

Rack-mounted discrete I/O (4/8/16/32 bits)

●

Remote discrete I/O on FIPIO bus (excluding

PMX P107 425)

TSX 87 40

●

Analog I/O interface (TSX ADT 201/202/203/AST 200) counting and positioning interface (TSX AXT 200),

●

Intelligent modules.

They also enable the PLC to be integrated into a multinetwork structure.

These processors, which can be programmed in PL7-3 language, are capable of processing PID control functions at the same time as sequential control and allow floating point calculation.

RUN

CPU

MEM

I/O

UTW

Principal characteristics

Processors

Functions No. of discrete I/O (in racks and/or remote on FIPIO bus)

No. of modules (1)

No. of network connections

Integrated FIPIO/FIPWAY

4 no

4 yes

Integrated UNI-TELWAY

Rack-mounted network module

TELWAY yes yes

MAPWAY/ETHWAY yes

PID control (see characteristics in appendix section 2-7 in this divider)

Memory Max memory size

Internal RAM

User cartridge

Bit instructions no yes yes

352 K words

96K words

352 K words

96 K words

64/128/256 K words 64/128/256 K words

0.32 µs 0.32 µs

Instruction execution times

Max size

Arithmetic operations

Logic operations

Floating point operations

No. of slots

No. of racks

No. of FIPIO connections

TPMX P107 425

2048

4.9 µs

3.9 µs

23.9 µs

112

TPMX P107 455

2048

4.9 µs

3.9 µs

23.9 µs

112

Integration into fan-cooled racks TSX RKN 82F / 82FD

TSX RKN 82FW11 / 82FDW11

4 4 Tasks (2) Auxiliary

_________

(1) excluding rack-mounted (TELWAY, MAPWAY, ETHWAY) and integrated (FIPWAY) network modules.

(2) 1 master task, 1 fast task, 1 interrupt task.

___________________________________________________________________________

2/23

_______________________________________________________________________________________

2.3 Version V4 processors for TSX and PMX 7 model 40 PLCs

2.3-1 TSX P47 400 processor

The TSX P47 400 processor can only control the following types of module :

●

Discrete I/O (4/8/16/32 bits)

Analog I/O interface (TSX ADT 201/202/203/AST 200)

Counting and positioning interface

(TSX AXT 200).

It also enables the PLC to be integrated into a singlenetwork structure.

It supports the PL7-3 programming language (Ladder,

Grafcet and Literal).

TSX 47 40

RUN

CPU

MEM

I/O

Principal characteristics

Processor

Functions No. of rack-mounted discrete I/O

No. of modules (1)

No. of network connections

Integrated UNI-TELWAY

TSX P47 400

512

1 no

Rack-mounted network module

TELWAY yes

MAPWAY/ETHWAY no

Memory

Instruction execution times

Max size

Max memory size

Internal RAM

User cartridge

Bit instructions

Arithmetic operations

Logic operations

No. of slots

No. of racks

Integration into non fan-cooled racks (2)

Tasks Master

Interrupt

Fast

Auxiliary

56 K words

24 K words

32 K words

0.50 µs

17.6 µs

15.5 µs

TSX RKN 82 / 82W11 / 52

_________

(1) excluding TELWAY network modules.

(2) integration into fan-cooled racks also possible.

___________________________________________________________________________

2/24

Processors 2

_______________________________________________________________________________________

2.3-2 TSX P47 410/P47 411 processors

TSX P47 410/411 processors can control the following types of module :

●

Discrete I/O (4/8/16/32 bits)

Analog I/O interface (TSX ADT 201/202/203/AST 200)

Counting and positioning interface

(TSX AXT 200)

Intelligent modules.

TSX 47 40

RUN

CPU

MEM

I/O

They also enable the PLC to be integrated into a singlenetwork structure.

They support the PL7-3 programming language (Ladder,

Grafcet and Literal).

Principal characteristics

Processors

Functions No. of rack-mounted discrete I/O

No. of modules (1)

No. of network connections

Integrated UNI-TELWAY

TSX P47 410

1024

1 no

Rack-mounted network module

TELWAY yes

MAPWAY/ETHWAY no

Memory

Instruction execution times

Max size

Max memory size

Internal RAM

User cartridge

Bit instructions

Arithmetic operations

Logic operations

No. of slots

No. of racks

Integration into non fan-cooled racks (2)

Tasks Master

Interrupt

Fast

Auxiliary

TSX P47 411

1024

1 yes yes no

112 K words

48 K words

32/64 K words

0.50 µs

17.6 µs

15.5 µs

TSX RKN 82 / 82W11 / 52

1 1

112 K words

48 K words

32/64 K words

0.50 µs

17.6 µs

15.5 µs

_________

(1) excluding TELWAY network modules.

2/25

_______________________________________________________________________________________

2.3-3 TSX P47 420 processor

The TSX P47 420 processor can control the following types of module :

●

Discrete I/O (4/8/16/32 bits)

Analog I/O interface (TSX ADT 201/202/203/AST 200)

Counting and positioning interface

(TSX AXT 200)

Intelligent modules.

TSX 47 40

RUN

CPU

MEM

I/O

UTW It also enables the PLC to be integrated into a singlenetwork structure.

It supports the PL7-3 programming language (Ladder,

Grafcet and Literal).

Principal characteristics

Processor

Functions No. of rack-mounted discrete I/O

No. of modules (1)

No. of network connections

TSX P47 420

1024

Integrated UNI-TELWAY

Rack-mounted network module

TELWAY yes yes

MAPWAY/ETHWAY yes

Max memory size 112 K words Memory

Instruction execution times

Max size

Internal RAM

User cartridge

Bit instructions

Arithmetic operations

Logic operations

No. of slots

No. of racks

Integration into non fan-cooled racks (2)

Tasks Master

Interrupt

Fast

Auxiliary

48 K words

32/64 K words

0.50 µs

17.6 µs

15.5 µs

TSX RKN 82 / 82W11 / 52

________

(1) excluding TELWAY or MAPWAY/ETHWAY network modules.

2/26

Processors 2

_______________________________________________________________________________________

2.3-4 TSX P67 410/P67 420 processors

TSX P67 410/420 processors can control the following types of module :

●

Discrete I/O (4/8/16/32 bits)

Analog I/O interface (TSX ADT 201/202/203/AST 200)

Counting and positioning interface

(TSX AXT 200)

Intelligent modules.

TSX 47 40

RUN

CPU

MEM

I/O

UTW

They also enable the PLC to be integrated into a multinetwork structure.

They support the PL7-3 programming language (Ladder,

Grafcet and Literal).

Principal characteristics

Processors

Functions

Memory

Instruction execution times

Max size

No. of rack-mounted discrete I/O

No. of modules (1)

No. of network connections

Integrated UNI-TELWAY

TSX P67 410

2048

2 no

Rack-mounted network module

TELWAY yes

MAPWAY/ETHWAY yes

Max memory size

Internal RAM

User cartridge

Bit instructions

Arithmetic operations

Logic operations

No. of slots

No. of racks

Integration into non fan-cooled racks (2)

Tasks Master

Interrupt

Fast

Auxiliary

TSX RKN 82 / 82W11 / 52

TSX P67 420

2048

2 yes yes yes

224 K words

96 K words

32 / 64 /128 K words

0.50 µs

224 K words

96 K words

0.50 µs

17.6 µs

15.5 µs

112

17.6 µs

15.5 µs

112

________

(1) excluding TELWAY and MAPWAY/ETHWAY network modules.

2/27

_______________________________________________________________________________________

2.3-5 TSX P87 410/P87 420 processors

TSX P87 410/420 processors can control the following types of module :

●

Discrete I/O (4/8/16/32 bits)

Analog I/O interface (TSX ADT 201/202/203/AST 200)

Counting and positioning interface

(TSX AXT 200)

Intelligent modules.

TSX 87 40

RUN

CPU

MEM

I/O

UTW

They also enable the PLC to be integrated into a multinetwork structure.

They support the PL7-3 programming language (Ladder,

Grafcet and Literal).

Principal characteristics

Processors

Functions

Memory

Instruction execution times

Integrated UNI-TELWAY

Rack-mounted network module

Max memory size

Internal RAM

User cartridge

Bit instructions

TELWAY

Arithmetic operations

Max size

Logic operations

No. of slots

No. of racks

Integration into fan-cooled racks no yes

MAPWAY/ETHWAY yes

352 K words yes yes yes

352 K words

96 K words 96 K words

64 / 128 / 256 K words

0.50 µs

10 µs

9 µs

112

0.50 µs

10 µs

9 µs

112

14 14

TSX RKN 82F / 82FD

TSX RKN 82FW11 / 82FDW11

Tasks

No. of discrete I/O

No. of modules (1)

No. of network connections

Master

Interrupt

Fast

Auxiliary

TSX P87 410

2048

TSX P87 420

2048

_________

2/28

Processors 2

_______________________________________________________________________________________

2.3-6 TSX P107 410/P107 420 processors

TSX P107 410/420 processors can control the following types of module :

●

Discrete I/O (4/8/16/32 bits)

Analog I/O interface (TSX ADT 201/202/203/AST 200)

Counting and positioning interface

(TSX AXT 200)

Intelligent modules.

TSX 107 40

RUN

CPU

MEM

I/O

UTW

They also enable the PLC to be integrated into a multinetwork structure.

They support the PL7-3 programming language (Ladder,

Grafcet and Literal).

Principal characteristics

Processors

Functions

Memory Max memory size

Internal RAM

User cartridge

Bit instructions Instruction execution times

Max size

Arithmetic operations

Logic operations

No. of slots

No. of racks

Integration into fan-cooled racks

Tasks

No. of rack-mounted discrete I/O

No. of modules (1)

No. of network connections

Integrated UNI-TELWAY

TSX P107 410

2048

4 no

Rack-mounted network module

TELWAY yes

MAPWAY/ETHWAY yes

Master

Interrupt

Fast

Auxiliary

352 K words

96 K words

64 / 128 / 256 K words

0.32 µs

4.7 µs

4 µs

112

TSX RKN 82F / 82FD

TSX RKN 82FW11 / 82FDW11

1 1

TSX P107 420

2048

4 yes yes yes

352 K words

96 K words

0.32 µs

4.7 µs

4 µs

112

_______

2/29

_______________________________________________________________________________________

2.3-7 TPMX P47 420/P67 420 processors

TPMX P47 420/P67 420 processors can control the following types of module :

●

Rack-mounted discrete I/O (4/8/16/32 bits)

●

Analog I/O interface (TSX ADT 201/202/203/AST 200), counting and positioning interface (TSX AXT 200)

TSX 87 40

RUN

●

Intelligent modules.

They also enable the PLC to be integrated into a singlenetwork (TPMX P47 420) or multi-network (TPMX P67

420) structure.

CPU

MEM

I/O

UTW

These processors, which can be programmed in PL7-3 language, are capable of processing PID control functions at the same time as sequential control functions and allow floating point calculation.

Principal characteristics

Processors

Functions No. of rack-mounted discrete I/O

No. of modules (1)

No. of network connections

TPMX P47 420

1024

Integrated UNI-TELWAY

Rack-mounted

TELWAY network module yes yes

MAPWAY/ETHWAY yes

PID control Typical max no. of loops (2) 16

7 ms

112 K words Memory

Execution time

Max memory size

Internal RAM

User cartridge

Instruction execution times

Bit instructions

Arithmetic operations

Logic operations

No. of slots Max size

No. of racks

Integration into non fan-cooled racks (3)

Tasks Master

Interrupt

48 K words

32 /64 K words

0.50

µ s

17.6

µ s

15.5

µ s

6 yes yes yes

7 ms

224 K words

96 K words

32 /64/128 K words

0.50

µ s

17.6

µ s

15.5

µ s

112

TSX RKN 82 / 82W11 / 52

Fast

Auxiliary

TPMX P67 420

2048

_________

(1) excluding rack-mounted (TELWAY, MAPWAY, ETHWAY) network modules.

(2) number of loops occupying less than 30 % of the processor's time.

2/30

Processors 2

_______________________________________________________________________________________

2.3-8 TPMX P87 420/P107 420 processors

TPMX P87 420/P107 420 processors can control the following types of module :

●

Rack-mounted discrete I/O (4/8/16/32 bits)

Analog I/O interface (TSX ADT 201/202/203/AST 200),

TSX 87 40

● counting and positioning interface (TSX AXT 200)

Intelligent modules.

RUN

CPU

They also enable the PLC to be integrated into a multinetwork structure.

MEM

I/O

UTW These processors, which can be programmed in PL7-3 language, are capable of processing PID control functions at the same time as sequential control functions and allow floating point calculation.

Principal characteristics

Processors

Functions No. of rack-mounted discrete I/O

No. of modules (1)

TPMX P87 420

2048

No. of network connections

Integrated UNI-TELWAY

Rack-mounted network module

TELWAY

4 yes yes

MAPWAY/ETHWAY yes

PID control Typical max no. of loops (2)

Execution time

Memory Max memory size

Internal RAM

Instruction execution times

User cartridge

Bit instructions

Arithmetic operations

Logic operations

Max size No. of slots

No. of racks

Integration into fan-cooled racks

Tasks Master

Interrupt

Fast

Auxiliary

TPMX P107 420

2048

4 yes yes yes

3 ms

352 K words

96 K words

2.7 ms

352 K words

96 K words

64/128/256 K words 64/128/256 K words

0.50

µ s

0.32

4.7

µ s

µ s s

112 112

14 14

TSX RKN 82F / 82FD

TSX RKN 82FW11 / 82FDW11

1 1

_________

(1) excluding rack-mounted (TELWAY, MAPWAY, ETHWAY) network modules.

(2) number of loops occupying less than 30 % of the processor's time.

2/31

_______________________________________________________________________________________

2.4-1 Compatibility between version V5 processors

●

Upward compatibility between processors in the same family :

- TSX P••4•5 processors

A user who has a configuration equipped with a TSX P••4•5 processor can substitute it with a more powerful TSX P••4•5 processor as long as it has the same level of functionality (UNI-TELWAY or FIP port).

- TPMX P••4•5 processors

A user who has a configuration equipped with a TPMX P••4•5 processor can substitute it with a more powerful TPMX P••4•5 processor as long as it has the same

level of functionality (UNI-TELWAY or FIP port).

●

Compatibility between TPMX P••4•5 and TSX P••4•5 processors

For a TSX model 40 configuration which is already in use and equipped with a

TSX P••4•5 processor, there is always at least a TPMX P••4•5 processor of equivalent or greater power which can ensure hardware and software compatibility.

A TPMX P••4•5 processor can therefore be substituted for a TSX P••4•5 processor in order to use the PID functions in the PL7-PMS or PL7-PMS2 software. A

TPMX P••4•5 processor, however, cannot be replaced by a TSX P••4•5 processor.

________________________________________________________________________________________

2.4-2 Compatibility between version V5 processors and version V4 processors

To ensure compatibility with the existing installation, a version V5 processor may be substituted for a version V4 processor on condition that :

● the V5 processor has at least the same level of functionality as the V4 processor it is replacing

● the application executed by the V4 processor is reconditioned using a level V5 software workshop so that it can be executed by the V5 processor.

___________________________________________________________________________

2/32

Processors 2

_______________________________________________________________________________________

2.5 Integrated UNI-TELWAY link

2.5-1 General

UNI-TELWAY is the communication standard between Telemecanique equipment

(PLCs, operator terminals, speed controllers, numerical controllers, weighing indicators, etc).

UNI-TELWAY also facilitates communication with non-Telemecanique equipment such as supervising and management computers.

UNI-TELWAY can be used for two types of application :

The control of electronic control equipment by a PLC

(ATV5 speed controllers, LT8 protection relays, numerical controls, etc)

ATV 45 speed controller NUM 760 numerical controller

TSX 87-40

XGS

DEF1

DEF2

IN1

IN2

OUT1

OUT2

XGS

Inductel

UNI-TELWAY

Man-machine dialogue and monitoring

(XBT operator terminals, MONITOR 77 supervisors, communication with non-

Telemecanique networks or computers, etc).

TSX 67-40

MONITOR 77

TSX 47-30

UNI-TELWAY UNI-TELWAY

The UNI-TELWAY bus requires :

1 master station which controls the line and polls the other (slave) stations. The master station can be either :

- A modular PLC of the TSX or PMX 7 range equipped with a TSX SCM 21.6 module

- A modular PLC of the TSX or PMX 7 range whose processor is equipped with an integrated UNI-TELWAY port

- A TSX 17-20 PL7-2 micro-PLC (with TSX P17 20 FC or FD cartridge), equipped with a TSX SCG 116 module.

1 to 27 slave stations

___________________________________________________________________________

2/33

_______________________________________________________________________________________

2.5-2 Description and connection

Description

Version V4 (TSX P47 411 and TSX or TPMX P•• 420) and version V5 (TSX or TPMX

P•• 425) processors, are equipped as standard with a UNI-TELWAY port using the following protocols :

- UNI-TELWAY master protocol

- UNI-TELWAY slave protocol.

This port enables the PLC to be directly connected to the UNI-TELWAY bus without having to install a TSX SCM 21.6 type module.

Connection to the PLC

1 processor.

TSX LES 64 or TSX LES 74 cable connector.

The UNI-TELWAY bus is wired to the same cable connector as the one used for local or remote I/O extensions :

- TSX LES 64 for local extensions

- TSX LES 74 for remote extensions

- TSX LES 64 or TSX LES 74 if there is no extension.

The address of the PLC must be coded on the UNI-TELWAY bus by setting the microswitches inside the TSX LES 64 or TSX

LES 74 cable connector (see Section 4.8

Divider B).

TSX .. 40

RUN

CPU

MEM

I/O

UTW

2 to UNI-TELWAY bus to local or remote I/O extension

___________________________________________________________________________

2/34

Processors 2

_______________________________________________________________________________________

Connection to the UNI-TELWAY bus

The TSX LES 64 or TSX LES 74 cable connector on the processor is connected to the

UNI-TELWAY bus via a TSX CSD 100 cable (10 m long) or TSX CSD 200 (20 m long) which is connected to the bus through a TSX SCA 50 T-junction box.

TSX .. 40

RUN

CPU

MEM

I/O

UTW

Processor

UNI-TELWAY bus

Telemecanique

TSX SCA 50

TSX CSD 100/200

TSX LES 64/74

Note :

For further information on use of the UNI-TELWAY link, refer to the TSX DM UTWE manual.

___________________________________________________________________________

2/35

_______________________________________________________________________________________

2.6 Integrated FIPWAY port

Version V5 processors (TSX P47 415, TSX or TPMX P47 455/ P67 455/ P87 455/ P107

455) have as standard an integrated FIPWAY port which conforms to the FIP standard.

This FIPWAY port supports two mutually exclusive operating configurations :

●

The FIPIO fieldbus, primarily used for remote operation of TBX I/O

●

The FIPWAY network, primarily used for inter-PLC communication.

Without prior PLC configuration, this port operates on the FIPWAY network by default.

If the PLC configuration requires the use of remote TBX I/O, this port operates as a FIPIO fieldbus. These operating modes cannot be used at the same time.

Detailed information on the hardware and software installation of the FIPIO bus and the FIPWAY network can be found in the TXT DR FIP V5E manual.

________________________________________________________________________________________

2.6-1 FIPIO - general information

FIPIO is the fieldbus for TSX Series 7 PLCs and enables PLC I/O and peripheral equipment to be sited right by the application.

From a PLC with an integrated FIPWAY link, the FIPIO bus enables connection of between 1 and 62 configurable devices (depending on the type of processor being used) such as :

●

Remote I/O interfaces (TBX)

Speed controllers (ATV5)

●

Operator control stations (CCX17)

PC compatible terminals for the factory floor (FTX 507, FTX 417)

Etc.

Principal characteristics

●

Structure

- Nature : Open-access industrial fieldbus conforming to the FIP standard

- Topology : Linking equipment by daisy-chaining or sequencer

- Communication : Via communication variables which can be seen by the user in the form of PL7-3 language objects : RI (inputs), RO (outputs) and via Series 7 datagrams.

●

Transmission

- Baud rate

- Medium

: 1 Mbps

: 150 Ohm twisted screened pair.

___________________________________________________________________________

2/36

Processors 2

_______________________________________________________________________________________

●

Configuration

No. of logical : 32 on TSX P47415 and TSX or TPMX P47455 processors connection points 64 on TSX or TPMX P67 455/ P87 455/P107 455 processors.

Connection points at addresses 0 and 63 are reserved : address 0 : reserved for the PLC address address 63 : reserved for the console

- Length : 1000 metres without repeaters (1 segment),

5000 metres with repeaters (5 segments maximum).

FIPIO bus

TSX 67-455 modular TBX monobloc TBX modular TBX

ATV5 monobloc TBX

FTX 507

___________________________________________________________________________

2/37

_______________________________________________________________________________________

2.6-2 FIPWAY network - general information

The FIPWAY cell network conforms to the FIP standard, and enables communication from application program to application program between :

● modular TSX and PMX Series 7 model 40 PLCs

●

TSX 17-20 micro-PLCs

CCX57/77 supervision stations

FTX 417 and FTX 507 terminals and workstations.

The FIPWAY network can be used in various ways :

● in a simple (single-network) architecture with just one FIPWAY segment

● in a hierarchical (multi-network) architecture where several FIPWAY segments can be governed by a more sophisticated local network such as MAPWAY, ETHWAY or

MMS/ETHERNET.

Principal characteristics :

●

Structure

- Nature : Open-access industrial fieldbus conforming to the FIP standard

- Topology : Linking equipment by daisy-chaining or sequencer

- Access method : Bus management via a floating bus arbiter.

●

Transmission

- Baud rate

- Medium

: 1 Mbps

: 150 Ohm screened twisted pair.

●

Configuration

- No. of stations : 32 stations per segment (maximum of 64 over all segments)

- Length : 1000 metres without repeaters (1 segment)

- Multi-network

5000 metres with repeaters (5 segments maximum)

: Interconnection of a maximum of 127 FIPWAY, TELWAY,

MAPWAY, ETHWAY or MMS/ETHERNET networks.

TSX 67-455 PMX 87-455

FIPWAY network

CCX 57

TSX 17-20 TSX 17-20

FTX 507

___________________________________________________________________________

2/38

Processors 2

_______________________________________________________________________________________

2.6-3 Description and connection

Description

TSX P47 415 and TSX or TPMX P•• 455 processors are equipped as standard with a

FIPWAY port which can operate as :

●

A FIPIO bus

●

A FIPWAY network (default operation).

This port is used to connect the PLC either to the FIPIO bus, or to the FIPWAY network.

Connection to the PLC

1 processor.

2 TSX LES 65 or TSX LES 75 cable connector.

The FIPIO bus or FIPWAY network is wired to the same cable connector as the one used for local or remote I/O extensions :

●

TSX LES 65 for local extensions

●

TSX LES 75 for remote electrical or fiber optic extensions

●

TSX LES 65 or TSX LES 75 if there are no extensions.

The address of the PLC must be coded by setting the micro-switches inside the TSX

LES 65 or TSX LES 75 (see Section 4.8-3

Divider B).

TSX .. 40

RUN

CPU

MEM

I/O

UTW

A to FIPIO bus or

FIPWAY network to local or remote I/O extension

Further information about connections for the FIPIO bus and the FIPWAY network can be found in the manual : TXT DR FIP V5E.

___________________________________________________________________________

2/39

_______________________________________________________________________________________

2.7 Appendix

_________________________________________________________________________________________

2.7-1 PID characteristics of TPMX P•• V5 processors

These are currently being evaluated and will be included in the next edition of this manual.

___________________________________________________________________________

2/40

________________________________________________________

Racks Section 3

___________________________________________________________________________

3.1

Presentation

Page

3/2

_________________________________________________________________________________________

3.2

Basic PLC racks 3/4

3/4

3/5

_________________________________________________________________________________________

3.3

Direct I/O extension racks 3/6

________________________________________________________________________________________

3.4

Local or remote I/O extension racks 3/7

___________________________________________________________________________

3/1

_______________________________________________________________________________________

3.1 Presentation

Several types of rack are available for different installation and layout requirements :

Standard rear-mounted racks with the complete or simplified bus

Designed for mounting on profiles, these racks have 11 slots of which 8 can receive the following modules :

- Discrete I/O, analog and counting interface modules

- Intelligent modules, if the rack is equipped with the complete bus.

19" front-mounted racks with the complete bus or simplified bus

Designed for mounting in standard 19" racks, these racks have 11 slots of which

8 can receive the following modules :

- Discrete I/O, analog and counting interface modules

- Intelligent modules, if the rack is equipped with the complete bus.

Short rear-mounted racks with the complete or simplified bus

Designed to fit into a small space, these racks have 8 slots of which 5 (1) can receive the following modules :

- Discrete I/O, analog and counting interface modules

- Intelligent modules, if the rack is equipped with the complete bus.

The backplanes of all the racks are equipped with locating devices which prevent errors during the installation or replacement of the I/O modules and intelligent modules.

Important

Grounding strip : all racks must be fitted with the TSX RAC

●●

grounding strip, unless they only contain discrete I/O interface modules and do not have a TSX

LES

●●

cable connector (see section 3.1, divider B).

●

TSX RAC 20 : grounding strip for standard rear-mounted racks

●

TSX RAC 25 : grounding strip for short rear-mounted racks

TSX RAC 20W11 : grounding strip for 19" front-mounted racks.

_________

3/2

Racks 3

_______________________________________________________________________________________

Simplified bus and complete bus

Depending on their type, the racks are equipped with either a simplified bus or a

complete bus.

●

The simplified bus enables data exchanges with discrete I/O interface modules and analog and counting interface modules.

●

The complete bus enables data exchange with intelligent modules as well as with the modules mentioned above.

Simplified bus

Discrete input modules

Discrete output modules

Analog and counting modules

Intelligent modules

- Axis control

- Communication

Network modules

(*)

Complete bus

3/3

_______________________________________________________________________________________

3.2 Basic PLC racks

3.2-1 Basic racks for PLCs with non fan-cooled processor

These racks are equipped with a complete bus and have :

●

11 slots in the standard and 19" racks

8 slots in the short rack.

The first two slots are reserved for either :

●

The AC power supply, or

The DC power supply.

The third : for the processor

The remaining slots can receive any type of module

●

8 slots in the standard and 19" racks

5 slots in the short racks.

Racks

Standard rear-mounted racks

Complete bus

TSX RKN 82

Short rear-mounted racks

TSX RKN 52

19'' frontmounted racks

TSX RKN 82W11

___________________________________________________________________________

3/4

Racks 3

_______________________________________________________________________________________

3.2-2 Basic racks for PLCs with fan-cooled processor

These racks are equipped with a complete bus. They have 11 slots and are fitted with a ventilation unit.

●

The first two slots are reserved for an AC or DC power supply depending on the type of rack

The third slot is reserved for the processor

The 8 remaining slots can receive any type of module.

The ventilation unit incorporates a temperature monitoring system (70°C threshold).

A arrière

TSX RKN 82F TSX RKN 82FD

TSX RKN 82FW11 TSX RKN 82FDW11

___________________________________________________________________________

3/5

_______________________________________________________________________________________

3.3 Direct I/O extension racks

These racks are equipped with a simplified bus and have :

●

8 slots in the standard and 19" racks

7 slots in the short rack.

They can only receive the following modules :

●

Discrete I/O interface modules

Analog interface module (TSX ADT./AST.)

Counting interface module (TSX AXT.).

They do not require a power supply and are directly connected to the basic PLC racks, or to the local or remote extension rack, by a cable 1.2 metres long which is delivered with the rack.

Bac court rearrack

TSX RKE 8

TSX RKE 7

TSX RKE 8W11

___________________________________________________________________________

3/6

Racks 3

_______________________________________________________________________________________

3.4 Local or remote I/O extension racks

These racks are equipped with either a simplified bus or a complete bus.

They have :

●

11 slots in the standard and 19" racks

8 slots in the short rack.

The first two slots are reserved for either :

●

An AC power supply, or

A DC power supply.

The third is reserved for one of the following :

●

A local I/O rackmaster module (TSX LES 20)

A fiber optic daisy-chaining module (TSX LFS 200/201) if it is a remote fiber optic I/O extension.

An electrical daisy-chaining module (TSX LES 200) if it is a remote electrical I/O extension.

The remaining slots (8 in the standard or 19" racks and 5 in the short rack) can receive the following types of module :

●

Discrete I/O interface module

Analog interface module (TSX ADT./AST.)

Counting interface module (TSX AXT.)

Intelligent modules if the rack is equipped with a complete bus.

(see next page for the different types of rack which can be used)

___________________________________________________________________________

3/7

_______________________________________________________________________________________

Local or remote I/O extension racks (contd)

Racks Complete bus Simplified bus

Standard rearmounted rack

TSX RKN 8 TSX RKS 8

TSX RKN 8 F

Short rearmounted rack

19" frontmounted rack

TSX RKN 5

Complete bus

TSX RKN 8W11

Simplified bus

TSX RKS 8W11

___________________________________________________________________________

3/8

________________________________________________________

Power supply Section 4

___________________________________________________________________________

4.1

Description

Page

4/2

4/3

4/4

______________________________________________________________________________________

4.2

Characteristics 4/5

4/6

4/7

___________________________________________________________________________

4/1

_______________________________________________________________________________________

4.1 Description

Each power supply module is designed to supply the necessary operating voltages to the basic PLC, or to the local and remote extension racks, from one of the following :

●

A 110/240 VAC mains power circuit

A 24 VDC mains power circuit

A 48 VDC mains power circuit.

Selection of the power supply module for the basic PLC

This depends on the type of processor used and the type of supply circuit available.

Version V4 and V5 processors

TSX P47 400/405

TSX P47 410/411/415 (1)

TSX or TPMX P47 420/425/455

TSX or TPMX P67 4

●●

TSX or TPMX P87 4

●●

TSX or TPMX P107 4

●●

Supply voltage

110 to 240 VAC

24 VDC

48 VDC

110 to 240 VAC

24 VDC

48 VDC

Power supply module

TSX SUP 40

TSX SUP 41

TSX SUP 42

TSX SUP 702

TSX SUP 61

TSX SUP 62

Selection of the power supply module for local or remote I/O extension racks

This selection depends on the type of bus used (simplified or complete) and on the type of mains power available.

Racks

TSX RKS 8

TSX RKS 8W11

TSX RKN 8

TSX RKN 8F

TSX RKN 8W11

TSX RKN 5

Type of bus simplified complete

Supply voltage

110 to 240 VAC

24 VDC

48 VDC

110 to 240 VAC

24 VDC

48 VDC

Power supply module

TSX SUP 40

TSX SUP 41

TSX SUP 42

TSX SUP 702

TSX SUP 61

TSX SUP 62

In all cases, the total current consumption must be calculated (see appendix A1, divider E).

_________

(1) if intelligent modules are used, the total current consumption must be calculated. If it exceeds the capacity of the power supply module, a TSX SUP 702 or SUP 61 or SUP 62 must be used, depending on the type of mains power available.

___________________________________________________________________________

4/2

Power supplies 4

_______________________________________________________________________________________

4.1-1 Physical appearance

Each power supply is a single-format module occupying two slots in the rack.

OK lamp (green) : lit if the internal voltages are present and correct.

ON lamp (orange) : lit if the mains power is present.

3 Terminal block for connection to the mains.

Alarm relay contact for slaving external power supplies (eg the supply of external power outputs).

Main power failure detector ON/OFF switch (delivered in the ON position).

POWER

__________________________________________________________________

4.1-2 Installation

The power supply module must be installed in the first two slots of the basic PLC rack and the local and remote I/O extension racks. The locating devices on the backplane of the rack must be set to the code of the module concerned.

Power supplies

TSX SUP 40

TSX SUP 41

TSX SUP 42

Code numbers

Power supplies

TSX SUP 702

TSX SUP 61

TSX SUP 62

Code numbers

934

931

932

___________________________________________________________________________

4/3

_______________________________________________________________________________________

4.1-3 Special functions

Alarm relay

The alarm relay, located inside the power supply module, has a dry contact which is available to the user on the front of the terminal block and can be used power supply slaving and safety circuits (see section 4.2, divider B).

This contact is :

● closed when the power supply module is operating normally.

● open when the processor is not in RUN mode and :

- the output voltages have not yet been established on power-up

- the watchdog alarm is triggered (hardware and software)

- the power supply has not yet been cut off, but one of the monitored voltages is below the correct level

- the power supply has cut out

- there is a STOP request from the processor.

The characteristics of the contact are the same as those given for the TSX DST 8 35 interface module (divider A - section 10.3 - page 10/29 and 10/33).

●

For DC

For AC

: 1A for U = 24V

: 1A for 127V < U < 240V

2A for U <127V

If a power supply module cuts out, users are recommended to wait about 20 seconds before it is powered up again.

Power failure detector

This device enables rapid detection of a power failure and halts the execution of the program before the inputs are reset by the power break, thus saving a coherent application context (see the PL7-3 TSX DR PL7 3 V5E manual, Section 7 "Power

Break /Return").

All the power supply modules are equipped with this detector, which can be found on the bottom of the module. At delivery, the switch 5 is set in the ON position, and can be switched ON or OFF by the user as required.

___________________________________________________________________________

4/4

Power supplies 4

_______________________________________________________________________________________

4.2 Characteristics

TSX SUP 40/702 AC power supplies

Characteristics

TSX SUP 40 TSX SUP 702

Primary

Maximum apparent power (1)

Power consumption (1)

Inrush current on power-up (2)

Secondary typical value duration

Output power (1)

5VDC output nominal voltage undervoltage trip overvoltage trip max current (1)

+12VDC outputs

(12VL & 12VP) (3) nominal voltage overvoltage trip max current (1)

105VA

100A

10 ms

40W

+5.05V

+4.6V

+5.5V

1.5A

+12V (VL+VP)

+12V

+13.5V

3.3A

180VA (250VA)

66W

60A

100W (130W)

10 ms

65W (85W)

+5.05V

+4.6V

+5.5V

9A (11A)

+12VL

+12V

+13.5V

+12VP

+12.5V

+14.5V

1.5A (2A) 3.5A (4A)

-12VDC output

Isolation

Primary/secondary nominal voltage max current -

1500 Vrms

50/60 Hz

-12V

0.1A

1500 Vrms

50/60 Hz

Note :

The outputs cannot all deliver their maximum current simultaneously in view of the authorized output power.

__________

(1) The first value corresponds to a power supply module mounted in a non fan-cooled rack, the second to a power supply module mounted in a fan-cooled rack.

(2) Value given for recurrence of power breaks within a period of 1s, at 55°C ambient temperature, in any active phase and in a voltage range 110 or 220VAC.

(3) 12VL = 12V logic, 12VP= 12V power.

___________________________________________________________________________

4/5

_______________________________________________________________________________________

4.2-1 TSX SUP 40/702 AC power supplies (contd)

Common characteristics

Nominal supply voltage

Voltage limit

Frequency limit

Masking of micro-cuts (1)

Harmonic content

Temperature duration repetition operating storage

TSX SUP 40/702

110-127 VAC

90 to 140 VAC

47 to 63 Hz

10 ms

1 Hz

10%

5 to + 55°C

-25°C to + 70°C

TSX SUP 40/702

220-240 VAC

180 to 264 VAC

47 to 63 Hz

10 ms

1 Hz

10%

_________

(1) With power failure detector set to "OFF".

___________________________________________________________________________

4/6

Power supplies 4

_______________________________________________________________________________________

4.2-2 TSX SUP 41/42/61/62 DC power supplies

Characteristics

TSX SUP 41 TSX SUP 42 TSX SUP 61 TSX SUP 62

Primary

Nominal supply voltage

Voltage limit

(including ripple)

Peak-to-peak ripple

Masking of micro-breaks (1)

24VDC

19.2-30V

< 10% of Un duration 10 ms repetition 1Hz

48VDC

38.4-60V

10 ms

1Hz

24VDC

19.2-30V

F = 100 or 150 Hz

2 ms

1Hz

48VDC

38.4-60V

2 ms

1Hz

Max current consumption with minimum supply and maximum load

Inrush current on power-up (2) value (3) value (4)

3.3A

25A

5.5A

1.6A

25A

3.6A

4.8A

40A

12A

2.4A

20A

Secondary

Output power

5 VDC output nominal voltage undervoltage trip overvoltage trip

40W

+5.05V

+4.6V

+5.5V

40W

+5.05V

+4.6V

+5.5V

65W

+5.05V

+4.6V

+5.5V

65W

+5.05V

+4.6V

+5.5V

+12 VDC outputs

(12VL+12VP) max current (5) 1.5A

nominal voltage overvoltage trip

+12V

+13.5V

-12VDC output max current (5) 3.3A

nominal voltage

max current (5) -

_________

1.5A

+12V

+13.5V

3.3A

+12V

+14.5V

-12V

0.1A

+12V

+14.5V

-12V

0.1A

(1) With power failure detector set to "OFF".

(2) Value given for recurrence of power breaks within a period of 1s, at 55°C ambient temperature.

(3) Value for a duration of 0 to 0.5 ms.

(4) Value of 0.5 to 500 ms.

(5) In view of the maximum output power (40 or 65W), the outputs cannot all deliver their maximum current simultaneously.

___________________________________________________________________________

4/7

_______________________________________________________________________________________

TSX SUP 41/42/61/62 DC power supplies (contd)

Common characteristics

TSX SUP 41 TSX SUP 42 TSX SUP 61 TSX SUP 62

Isolation

Primary/secondary

Temperature operation storage

1500 V rms

5 to + 55°C

-25°C to + 70°C

50/60 Hz

___________________________________________________________________________

4/8

________________________________________________________

Composition of a PLC base Section 5

___________________________________________________________________________

5.1

TSX or PMX 47-40 PLC base with V5 processor

page

5/2

______________________________________________________________________________________

5.2

TSX or PMX 67-40/87-40/107-40 PLC base with V5 processor 5/3

______________________________________________________________________________________

5.3

TSX or PMX 47-40 PLC base with V4 processor 5/4

______________________________________________________________________________________

5.4

TSX or PMX 67-40 PLC base with V4 processor 5/5

______________________________________________________________________________________

5.5

TSX or PMX 87-40/107-40 PLC base with V4 processor 5/6

___________________________________________________________________________

5/1

_______________________________________________________________________________________

5.1 TSX or PMX 47-40 PLC base with V5 processor

Processors

TSX P47 405 TSX P47 415 TSX/TPMX P47 425 TSX/TPMX P47 455

Basic rack

TSX RKN 82/82W11

TSX RKN 52

Power supply

I/O interfaces and/or intelligent modules

Interfaces

TSX SUP 40/41/42

TSX SUP 702/61/62

Interfaces and/or modules

PLC base

___________________________________________________________________________

5/2

Composition of a PLC base 5

_______________________________________________________________________________________

Processors

Basic fan-cooled rack

TSX/TPMX P67 425/455 TSX/TPMX P87 425/455 TSX /TPMX P107 425/455

TSX RKN 82F/82FW11

TSX RKN 82FD/82FDW11

Power supply

I/O interfaces and/or intelligent modules

TSX SUP 702 TSX SUP 61/62

Interfaces and/or modules

PLC base

___________________________________________________________________________

5/3

_______________________________________________________________________________________

5.3 TSX or PMX 47-40 PLC base with V4 processor

_______________________________________________________________________________________

Processors

TSX P47 400 TSX P47 410 TSX P47 411 TSX/TPMX P47 420

Basic rack

TSX RKN 82/82W11

TSX RKN 52

Power supply

TSX SUP 40/41/42 TSX SUP 702/61/62

Interfaces and/or intelligent modules

PLC base

Interfaces

Interfaces and/or modules

___________________________________________________________________________

5/4

Composition of a PLC base 5

_______________________________________________________________________________________

5.4 TSX or PMX 67-40 PLC base with V4 processor

Processors

TSX P67 410 TSX/TPMX P67 420

Basic rack

TSX RKN 82/82W11

TSX RKN 52

Power supply

I/O interfaces and/or intelligent modules

TSX SUP 702/61/62

Interfaces and/or modules

PLC base

___________________________________________________________________________

5/5

_______________________________________________________________________________________

5.5 TSX or PMX 87-40/107-40 PLC base with V4 processor

Processors

Basic fan-cooled rack

TSX P87 410 TSX/TPMX P87 420 TSX P107 410 TSX/TPMX P107 420

TSX RKN 82F/82FW11

TSX RKN 82FD/82FDW11

Power supply

I/O interfaces and/or intelligent modules

TSX SUP 702

Interfaces and/or modules

TSX SUP 61/62

PLC base

___________________________________________________________________________

5/6

________________________________________________________

Direct I/O extensions Section 6

___________________________________________________________________________

6.1

Presentation

Page

6/2

______________________________________________________________________________________

6.2

Composition of a direct I/O extension 6/3

___________________________________________________________________________

6/1

_______________________________________________________________________________________

6.1 Presentation

The direct I/O extension can be used to extend :

●

The PLC base

The local or remote I/O extensions.

PLC base

It is composed of an empty rack (section

3.3, divider A) which can only accept the following type of modules :

●

Discrete I/O interface modules

●

Analog interface modules (TSX ADT.

and TSX AST.)

● counting interface module (TSX AXT.).

It is connected to the basic PLC rack, or to the local or remote I/O extension via a cable 1.2 metres long that is supplied with the rack.

Discrete I/O direct extension

Local or remote extension

Some of the module slots are masked by covers :

●

The first three slots in the case of the standard or 19" racks

●

The first slot in the case of the short rack.

Discrete I/O direct extension

The number of I/O that can be controlled depends on the type of rack selected :

B B

Short rack Standard or 19" rack

7 slots 8 slots

___________________________________________________________________________

6/2

Direct I/O extensions 6

_______________________________________________________________________________________

6.2 Composition of a direct I/O extension

Extension rack

I/O modules

Direct

I/O extension

TSX RKE 8/RKE 8W11

I/O modules

Interfaces

TSX RKE 7

___________________________________________________________________________

6/3

_______________________________________________________________________________________

___________________________________________________________________________

6/4

________________________________________________________

Local I/O extensions Section 7

___________________________________________________________________________

7.1

Presentation

Page

7/2

______________________________________________________________________________________

7.2

Composition of a local I/O extension 7/3

______________________________________________________________________________________

7.3

TSX LES 20 local rackmaster module 7/4

______________________________________________________________________________________

7.4

Architecture and connection accessories 7/5

7/5

7/6

___________________________________________________________________________

7/1

_______________________________________________________________________________________

7.1 Presentation

Local I/O extensions enable the PLC base to be extended so that it can control the maximum number of I/O points that can be driven by the various processors.

They are composed of empty racks (see section 3.4, divider A), in which are installed :

Local extension

●

In the first three slots :

- A power supply module (see section

4.1, divider A),

- A TSX LES 20 local rackmaster module.

●

The other slots can receive :

- Discrete I/O, analog and counting interface modules

- Intelligent modules if the rack is equipped with a complete bus.

Discrete I/O direct extension

Each local I/O extension rack can itself be extended by one direct I/O extension rack.

The maximum distance between the PLC base and the last local I/O extension rack must not exceed 30 metres.

The number of I/O that can be controlled on the size of the selected rack :

C C

Bac court

5 emplacements

Bacs standard et 19''

8 emplacements

C C

B B

B Bac d'extension directe

B Direct extension rack

C Bac d'extension d'entrées/sorties locales

___________________________________________________________________________

7/2

Local I/O extensions 7

_______________________________________________________________________________________

7.2 Composition of a local I/O extension

Local rackmaster module

Local I/O extension rack

TSX LES 20

TSX RKS 8/RKS 8W11

TSX RKN 8/RKN 8F/RKN 8W11/RKN 5

Power supply

I/O and/or intelligent modules

Local

I/O extension

TSX SUP 40/41/42

I/O modules

TSX SUP 702/61/62

I/O and/or intelligent modules

___________________________________________________________________________

7/3

_______________________________________________________________________________________

7-3 TSX LES 20 local rackmaster module

The TSX LES 20 local rackmaster module is used to control the local I/O extension in which it is installed and any direct I/O extension with which it may be associated.

Description

On the front panel of the module are :

A RUN lamp (green) : when lit, this indicates the module is operating correctly.

An I/O lamp (red) : when lit, this indicates a fault in the rack(s) controlled by the module.

A 15-pin male SUB-D connector for the

TSX LES 61/62 cable connector.

LES 20

RUN

I/O

Installation

The TSX LES 20 module is installed in the local I/O extension rack in the slot marked

M located to the right of the power supply module. The locating devices on the backplane of the rack must be set to the code number corresponding to that of the rackmaster module.

Code number : 890

___________________________________________________________________________

7/4

Local I/O extensions 7

_______________________________________________________________________________________

Functions

The TSX LES 20 module performs data exchanges between the I/O local extension rack and the processor. It converts the parallel data received from the I/O modules into serial data for transmission to the processor via a serial link, which must not exceed 30 metres.

In the other direction it converts serial data from the processor into parallel data for the modules.

The link comprises a screened twisted pair connecting cable (TSX CBC...).

The cables are connected to the racks by means of either :

- A TSX LES 64 or 65 cable connector installed on the processor

- A TSX LES 62 cable connector installed on the intermediate TSX LES 20 module(s)

- A TSX LES 61 cable connector installed on the end TSX LES 20 module.

___________________________________________________________________

7-4 Architecture and connection accessories

7.4-1 Architecture

Local extensions can be daisy-chained, and are connected in a bus structure from the processor in the PLC base via a high-speed transmission serial link. The maximum number depends on the processor used (see section 9, divider A).

They can also be connected to the end of a remote I/O extension (see section 8, divider

A).

The total length of the connecting cables between the PLC processor and the last local

I/O extension is 30 metres.

A C C

B B B

A PLC base

B Direct I/Oextension

C Local I/O extension

___________________________________________________________________________

7/5

_______________________________________________________________________________________

7.4-2 Connection accessories

4 4

B B

A PLC base

B Direct I/O extension

C Local I/O extension

1 The TSX LES 64 or TSX LES 65 cable connector is mounted on the PLC processor for connection to the UNI-TELWAY bus, FIPIO bus or the FIPWAY network. The connector should be selected as follows :

●

TSX LES 64 cable connector if the processor has an integrated UNI-TELWAY port.

TSX LES 65 cable connector if the processor has an integrated FIP port.

TSX LES 64 or 65 cable connector if the processor has no integrated FIP or

UNI-TELWAY port.

2 The TSX LES 62 cable connector is mounted on the TSX LES 20 module on the intermediate local extensions.

The TSX LES 61 cable connector is mounted on the TSX LES 20 module on the last local extension. This connector contains the end-of line adapter circuits.

4 The TSX LES 20 local rackmaster module.

5 TSX CBC connecting cables, available in 6 lengths :

1 m long

3 m long

5 m long

12 m long

20 m long

30 m long

: TSX CBC 010

: TSX CBC 030

: TSX CBC 050

: TSX CBC 120

: TSX CBC 200

: TSX CBC 300

___________________________________________________________________________

7/6

________________________________________________________

Remote I/O extensions Section 8

___________________________________________________________________________

8.1

Presentation

Page

8/2

______________________________________________________________________________________

8.2

Composition of a remote I/O extension 8/3

______________________________________________________________________________________

8.3

Fiber optic remote I/O extensions 8/4

____________________________________________________________________________________

8.4

Electrical remote I/O extensions 8/12

___________________________________________________________________________

8/1

_______________________________________________________________________________________

8.1 Presentation

Remote I/O extensions enable racks to be located at a considerable distance from the

PLC base. The racks may contain any type of module (discrete I/O, analog, counting interfaces, or intelligent modules).

Two type of technology can be used :

●

remote operation via fiber optic bus : maximum distance 2000 meters (see

● characteristics in section 8.3-4, divider A)

remote operation via electrical bus : maximum distance 500 meters (see characteristics in section 8.4-5, divider A).

Remote I/O extensions are composed of empty racks in which are installed :

●

In the first two slots :

- A power supply module (see section

Remote extension

●

4.1, divider A)

In the third slot :

- A TSX LFS 200 or TSX LFS 201 fiber optic rackmaster module if remote operation is via a fiber optic bus.

- A TSX LES 200 electrical rackmaster module if remote operation is via an electrical bus.

The other slots can receive :

- Discrete I/O, analog and counting interface modules

- Intelligent modules if the rack is equipped with a complete bus.

Discrete I/O direct extension

Each remote I/O extension can itself be extended by one direct I/O extension rack.

Communication between the PLC base and the bus is provided either by a TSX LFS 120 or TSX LFS 121 fiber optic adapter module or by a TSX LES 120 electrical adapter module.

The number of I/O modules that can be controlled depends on the size and type of the racks used.

C C

Bac standard et 19''

8 slots

C C

B B

B bac d'extension directe

B Direct extension rack

C bac d'extension

Local extension rack

___________________________________________________________________________

8/2

Remote I/O extensions 8

8.2 Composition of a remote I/O extension

Fiber optic or electrical rackmaster module

Remote I/O extension rack

TSX RKS 8/RKS 8W11

TSX RKN 8/RKN 8F/RKN 8W11/RKN 5

Power supply

TSX SUP 40/41/42 TSX SUP 702/61/62

I/O and/or intelligent modules

Remote I/O

I/O modules

I/O and/or intelligent modules

___________________________________________________________________________

8/3

_______________________________________________________________________________________

8.3 Fiber optic remote I/O extensions

Selection of the adapter module (TSX LFS 120 or TSX LFS 121) and fiber optic rackmaster module (TSX LFS 200 or TSX LFS 201) depends on the diameter of the fiber optic used.

●

TSX LFS 120/200 : diameter of fiber optic 100/140

TSX LFS 121/201 : recommended diameter of fiber optic 62.5/125 and 50/125.

________________________________________________________________________________________

8.3-1 TSX LFS 120 and TSX LFS 121 fiber optic adapter modules

Physical appearance

On the front panel of these modules are :

An OK lamp (green) : when lit, this indicates the module is working correctly.

Two channel 1 reception connectors, for transmission (TX) and reception

(RX) fibers.

Two channel 2 reception connectors, for transmission (TX) and reception

(RX) fibers.

A female 15-pin SUB D connector which can accept a TSX LES 71 or 70 cable connector for electrical connection to the processor

LFS 120

Installation

TSX LFS 120/121 fiber optic adapter modules are installed in the PLC base as close as possible to the processor.

The locating devices on the backplane of the rack must be set to the code number of the module.

Code number : 891

Functions

These modules are used to :

- adapt the high-speed transmission electrical bus in the PLC processor to a fiber optic bus

- transmit the I/O bus in an optical form to the remote I/O extension rack.

They have 2 fiber optic adapter channels, each channel comprising one transmission fiber and one reception fibre.

8/4

Remote I/O extensions 8

8.3-2 TSX LFS 200 and TSX LFS 201

Physical appearance.

On the front panel of these modules are :

1 An OK lamp (green) : when lit, this indicates the module is working correctly.

2 An I/O lamp (red) : when lit, this indicates a fault in the rack(s) controlled by the module.

3 Two reception channel connectors for the transmission (TX) and reception

(RX) fibers.

4 Two transmission channel connectors for the transmission (TX) and reception

(RX) fibers.

5 An addressing label.

6 The addressing switches.

Installation

The TSX LFS 200/201 modules are installed in the remote I/O extension rack in the slot marked M to the right of the power supply module. The locating devices on the backplane of the rack must be set to the code number of the module.

Code number : 892

LFS 200

RUN

I/O

Functions

These modules ensure the reception and retransmission of an optical channel in the case of a bus architecture arrangement.

The addresses of the racks controlled by the TSX LFS 200 or TSX LFS 201 module are defined by the positions of the switches located on the side of the module (see section

12.1-3, divider A).

___________________________________________________________________________

8/5

_______________________________________________________________________________________

8.3-3 Architecture and connection accessories

Bus architecture

In a bus architecture, a maximum of four remote I/O extensions can be daisy-chained on a fiber optic bus running from the processor located in the PLC base. Each remote

I/O extension can itself be extended by one direct I/O extension rack.

Maximum distances for TSX LFS 120 and TSX LFS 200 modules

(for TSX LFS 121/201, see adapter module characteristics in section 8.3-4 of this divider).

●

PLC base to first extension : 1000 meters

●

Extension to extension : 1000 meters

●

PLC base to last extension : 2000 meters (1).

7 9 8 7 7 8

3 6 5 2

A Basic PLC rack

B Direct I/O extension rack

C Fiber optic remote I/O extension

Components 1 to 9 above are described on page 8/9 of this section.

_________

(1) If the remote I/O extension is equipped with intelligent modules, the distance is limited to :

- 750 meters for TSX or TPMX P47 4•• / P67 4•• processors

- 1000 meters for TSX or TPMX P87 4•• / P107 4•• processors

___________________________________________________________________________

8/6

Remote I/O extensions 8

Star architecture

Remote fiber optic extensions can be arranged in branches from the TSX LFS 120 or

TSX LFS 121 fiber optic adapter module.

As a PLC base can support two TSX LFS 120 or 121 modules, each of which can support two branches, it is possible to create four branches from the PLC base; each branch being limited to a maximum of four remote I/O extensions in a bus architecture.

Each remote I/O extension can itself be extended by a direct I/O extension.

Maximum distances for TSX LFS 120 and TSX LFS 200 modules

These are the same for a single branch as those given for the bus architecture (see previous page).

C 9

1 1

7 2

B B

8 3 6 4 5

C C

1 1

B B G

A Basic PLC rack

B Direct I/O extension rack

C Fiber optic remote I/O extension

___________________________________________________________________________

8/7

_______________________________________________________________________________________

Mixed architecture

Local and remote I/O extensions in a mixed bus/star architecture

7 2

8 13

3 6 5

A Basic PLC rack

B Direct I/O extension rack

C Fiber optic remote I/O extension rack

D Local I/O extension rack

___________________________________________________________________________

8/8

Remote I/O extensions

_______________________________________________________________________________________

Description of the components

1 TSX LFS 200 or TSX LFS 201 fiber optic rackmaster module.

2 TSX LFS 120 or TSX LFS 121 fiber optic adapter module.

3 TSX LES 74 or TSX LES 75 cable connector, installed on the processor in the PLC base and connecting it to a TSX LFS 120/121 FO adapter module. These connectors are also used for connection to the UNI-TELWAY bus, FIPIO bus or to the FIPWAY network. The correct cable is selected as follows :

• TSX LES 74 cable connector if the processor has an integrated UNI-TELWAY port.

• TSX LES 75 cable connector if the processor has an integrated FIP port.

• TSX LES 74 or 75 if the processor does not have an integrated FIP or UNI-TELWAY port.

4 TSX LES 71 cable connector, installed on the TSX LFS 120/121 FO adapter module and connecting it to the processor and to a second FO adapter module. It is used as an intermediate cable connector whenever a second FO adaptor module is installed in the PLC base.

5 TSX LES 70 cable connector, installed on the last TSX LFS 120/121 FO adapter module and connecting it to either :

- The processor and a TSX LES 20 local rackmaster module if the PLC base has only one FO adapter module

- The previous FO adapter module and a TSX LES 20 local rackmaster module if the PLC base has two FO adapter modules.

6 TSX CBC 003 electrical connector cable (0.35 m long) for connecting the TSX LES

74/75 and 71/70 or TSX LES 71 and 70 cable connectors.

7 Cable pre-equipped with 100/140 diameter fiber optic for use with TSX LFS 120

and TSX LFS 200 modules only : TSX CBD 050 (5 m) or TSX CBD 300 (30 m).

This cable is used to connect a TSX LFS 120 module to a TSX LFS 200 module or two TSX LFS 200 modules.

8 User-supplied FO cable for use in addition to pre-equipped cables for cable runs over 30 m. This cable must be of the type GI 100/140 and Na = 0.29. After being cut to the required length, it must be spliced at each end to a TSX CBD 050 or TSX CBD

300 to a pre-equipped FO cable.

9 FO cable splices.

The cutting and splicing of FO cable, and the calculation of the optical consumption, must be done by qualified specialists.

& TSX LES 20 local rackmaster module.

TSX LES 62 cable connector for intermediate rackmasters.

" TSX LES 61 cable connector for end rackmaster.

' TSX CBC... electrical connector cable.

Note : If modules TSX LFS 121/201 are being used, no pre-equipped FO cables are supplied.

Characteristics of the cables which should be used are defined in section 8.3-5 in this divider.

___________________________________________________________________________

8/9

_______________________________________________________________________________________

8.3-4 Characteristics

FO bus

Fiber optic diameter

100/140

62.5/125

50/125

Modules used

Distance (expressed in meters) between (1)

Base/first extension

Extension / extension

Base / last extension

1000 m max 2000 m max TSX LFS 120 1000 m max

TSX LFS 200

TSX LFS 121 570 m min

TSX LFS 201 2000 m max

570 m min

2000 m max

1800 m max

2000 m max

2000 m max TSX LFS 121 1800 m max

TSX LFS 201

TSX LFS 121 490 m max

TSX LFS 201

490m max 1960 m max

Maximum number of stations connectable : 4

Transmission frequency : 2.5 MHz

(1) Intelligent modules can be decentralized using an FO bus, the maximum distance being limited according to the type of processor.

. TSX P47 4../P67 4.. processor : 750 meters

. TSX P87 4../P107 4.. processor : 1000 meters

TSX LFS 120/121 and TSX LFS 200/201 modules

Modules

5VDC consumption

TSX LFS 120/121 TSX LFS 200/201

260 mA typical

400 mA max.

350 mA typical

500 mA max.

12VDC consumption 15 mA typical

30 mA max.

850 nanometer

78 mA typical

120 mA max.

850 nanometer Transmitter wavelength

Transmitter optical power at 25°C (1)

100/140 fiber with Na= 0.29 µm

62.5/125 fiber with Na=0.275 µm -13.5 dBm

50/125 fiber with Na=0.2 µm

Transmission frequency

(electrical signal)

-9 dBm (-13 dBm) -9 dBm (-13 dBm)

-18.3 dBm

2.5 MHz

-13.5 dBm

-18.3 dBm

2.5 MHz

Reception optical level -21.5 dBm min.

-12 dBm max.

20 MHz

-21.5 dBm min.

-12 dBm max.

20 MHz Reception bandwidth

(optical coupler)

Na = numerical aperture

(1) Measured at 25°C at the end of 5 meters of FO cable.

The values in brackets apply to TSX LFS 120 and TSX LFS 200 modules.

___________________________________________________________________________

8/10

Remote I/O extensions

_______________________________________________________________________________________

8.3-5 FO cabling

Two types of fiber optic link are required for connecting :

●

TSX LFS 120/121 module

TSX LFS 200/201 module.

TSX LFS 200/201 module

TSX LFS 200/201 module.

After installation, the optical consumption of the link must be checked (see appendix 5, divider E)

Link between TSX LFS 120 × TSX LFS 200 and TSX LFS 200

TSX LFS 200

For these connections, Telemecanique offers two pre-equipped cables comprising two

100/140 diameter fiber optics (transmission and reception) :

●

TSX CBD 050 (5m long).

TSX CBD 300 (30m long).

For cable runs over 30m, a user-supplied FO cable of the type GI 100/140 and Na 0.29, must be spliced at both ends to the pre-equipped cables.

Note :

Cutting and splicing must be done by qualified specialists.

Link between TSX LFS 121

TSX LFS 201 and TSX LFS 201

TSX LFS 201

As Telemecanique does not offer a pre-equipped cable for this type of connection, the user should choose an FO cable which has the following characteristics :

Type of cable

Multimode fiber cable with index gradient and typical bandwidth

200 MHz x km

Fiber optic diameter

100/140

62.5/125

50/125

Weakening at

850 nanometers

- 5 dB/km

- 3.5 dB/km

- 3.2 dB/km

Numerical opening

0.28 ....0.32 µm

0.275 µm ± 0.03

0.2...0.23 µm ± 0.2

Note :

For cable connection to TSX LFS 121 and TSX LFS 201 modules, an ST type connector with ceramic ferrule and metal body must be used. Insertion losses : 0.5 dB typical.

___________________________________________________________________________

8/11

_______________________________________________________________________________________

8.4 Electrical remote I/O extensions

8.4-1 TSX LES 120 electrical adapter module

Physical appearance

On the front panel of the module are :

OK lamp (green) : when lit, this indicates that the module is working correctly.

15-pin female SUB D connector, which accepts the male connector on the connection cable from the TSX LES

805 or TSX LES 810 tap-junction box.

15-pin female SUB D connector, which accepts a TSX LES 71 or 70 connection cable for electrical connection to the processor.

LES 120

Installation

The TSX LES 120 electrical adapter module should be installed in the PLC base as close as possible to the processor, preferably next to it.

The locating devices on the backplane of the rack must be set to the code number corresponding to that of the module.

Code number : 893

Functions

This module performs the following separate functions :

●

It adapts the short-distance electrical bus in the PLC processor into an isolated long-

● distance electrical link

Conforming with the RS 485 standard, it transmits data to the farthest extension rack(s). Transmission is via two screened twisted pairs, one of which is dedicated to transmission and the other to reception.

Each TSX LES 120 module has two electrical long-distance adapter channels, each of which can control a maximum of four decentralized extension racks plus the corresponding direct extension racks (up to the maximum number of extension racks which can be controlled by the processor). As the PLC base can accept two TSX LES 120 modules, four remote extensions can thus be created, each with a maximum length of 500 meters.

___________________________________________________________________________

8/12

Remote I/O extensions 8

_______________________________________________________________________________________

8.4-2 TSX LES 200 electrical rackmaster module

Physical appearance

On the front panel of the module are :

OK lamp (green) : when lit, this indicates that the module is working correctly.

15-pin female SUB D connector, which accepts the male connector on the connection cable from the TSX LES

805 or TSX LES 810 tap-junction box.

I/O lamp (red) : when lit, this indicates a fault in the rack(s) controlled by the module.

LES 200

I/O

5 4

Addressing label.

Group of switches for defining the rack address.

Installation

The TSX LES 200 module is installed in the remote I/O extension next to the power supply module in the slot marked M. The locating devices on the backplane of the rack must be set to the code number corresponding to that of the module.

Code number : 894

Functions

This module performs the following separate functions :

●

It transforms the isolated long-distance electrical link to a parallel link.

It handles data transmission to the basic PLC rack.

It sets the address codes for the rack.

Addressing the racks controlled by a TSX LES 200 module is via switches which are located on the module (see section 12.1-3 of this divider).

___________________________________________________________________________

8/13

_______________________________________________________________________________________

8.4-3 TSX LES 805 and TSX LES 810 cable connectors

The wiring system for electrical remote extensions depends on TSX LES 805 or TSX

LES 810 tap-junction boxes to connect the TSX LES 120 or TSX LES 200 module to the

TSX CB

●●● cable which is used to carry data over a long distance.

These tap-junction boxes are made up of 3 components :

●

A cable connector a , made of metal and fitted with :

- Two cable glands through which the TSX CB

●●● main cable travels.

- A printed circuit which connects the cable coming from the TSX LES 120 or TSX LES

200 module and the main cable carrying long-distance data. This printed circuit can

● hold :

. Two connectors JA and JB for connecting the main cable

. A switch S1 which switches a resistor to carry out the end of line instruction if the tap-junction box is the last in the chain. This switch is originally set in the OFF position. At the end of the chain, set this switch in the ON position.

. Two cable clamps c1 and c2 which clamp the main cable and also earth the grounding braid of this same cable.

A cable b fitted at the factory and integral to the box, which links the TSX LES 120

● or TSX LES 200 module and the cable connector.

This cable b varies in length depending on the assembly chosen :

- TSX LES 805 : 5 meters long, TSX LES 810 : 10 meters long.

A 15-pin male SUB D connector c for connection to the TSX LES 120 or TSX LES

200 module. This connector should be screwed on to the module to ensure continuity of grounding.

The tap-junction box should be installed inside the case or enclosure in which either the basic PLC rack or the extension rack is installed.

a S1

ON OFF

JA JB c1 b c c2

___________________________________________________________________________

8/14

Remote I/O extensions 8

_______________________________________________________________________________________

8.4-4 Architecture and connection accessories

●

Bus architecture

The main cable 8 can be used to connect several extension racks from the PLC base.

In such a case the cable acts as a bus on which remote extension racks can be connected. The maximum number of remote I/O extension racks is 4; each remote I/O extension rack can be complemented by a direct I/O extension rack.

Note :

The number of extension racks is limited according to the type of processor used

(see section 9 of this divider).

Maximum distance :

PLC base/last extension : 500 meters maximum with

TSX LES 805 tap-junction box

(see characteristics in section 8.4-5 of this divider).

7 channel 1

3 5 6 1 1

B B

500 meters max for TSX LES 805

400 meters max for TSX LES 810

A basic PLC rack

B Direct I/O extension rack

C Electrical remote I/O extension rack

The various components

8 are described at the end of this section.

___________________________________________________________________________

8/15

_______________________________________________________________________________________

●

Star architecture

The electrical connections can be branched out in several directions from the TSX LES

120 electrical adapter module.

As a PLC base can accept two TSX LFS 120 modules and each module two branching channels, a maximum of four channels can be branched from the PLC base. A channel is limited to a maximum of four remote I/O extension racks in a bus architecture.

Each remote I/O extension rack can itself take a direct I/Oextension rack.

Note :

The number of extension racks is limited according to the type of processor used

(see section 9 of this divider)

Maximum distances

On a single channel they are the same as for a bus architecture (see previous page).

Example : extension for a TSX LES 120 electrical adapter module

C channel 1

7 channel 2

1 3 5 6 1

B B

500 meters max for TSX LES 805

400 meters max for TSX LES 810

500 meters max for TSX LES 805

400 meters max for TSX LES 810

A basic PLC rack

B direct I/O extension rack

C electrical remote I/O extension rack

The various components

1 to 8 are described at the end of this section

___________________________________________________________________________

8/16

Remote I/O extensions 8

_______________________________________________________________________________________

Star architecture (contd)

Example : extension for two TSX LES 120 electrical adapter modules

channel 1 2 nd module

channel 2 2 nd module

7 8 7

C C

1 1

B B

500 meters max for TSX LES 805

400 meters max for TSX LES 810

channel 1 1 st module

7 8 7

500 meters max for TSX LES 805

400 meters max for TSX LES 810

channel 2 1 st module

8 7

C C

1 3 4 5 6 1

B B

500 meters max for TSX LES 805

400 meters max for TSX LES 810

C basic PLC rack direct I/O extension rack electrical remote I/O extension rack

500 meters max for TSX LES 805

400 meters max for TSX LES 810

___________________________________________________________________________

8/17

_______________________________________________________________________________________

●

Mixed architecture

Local and remote I/O extensions (electrical and fiber optic) in a bus/star architecture.

Electrical remote I/O extension channel 1 channel 2

500/400 m max (1)

8 7

500/400 m max (1)

8 7

9 11

B A 12 B

3 4 5 6

17 12

Local I/O extension

17 13

Fiber optic remote

I/O extension

30 meters maximum

C basic PLC rack direct I/O extension rack electrical remote I/O extension rack

__________

8/18

2000 meters maximum

fiber optic remote I/O extension rack

E local I/O extension rack

Remote I/O extensions 8

_______________________________________________________________________________________

●

Description of the various components

TSX LES 200 electrical rackmaster module.

TSX LES 120 electrical adapter module.

TSX LES 74 or TSX LES 75 cable connector, installed on the processor in the PLC base and connecting it to a TSX LES 120 electrical adapter module. These connectors are also used for connection to the UNI-TELWAY bus, FIPIO bus or to the FIPWAY network. The correct cable is selected as follows :

- TSX LES 74 cable connector if the processor has an integrated UNI-TELWAY port

- TSX LES 75 cable connector if the processor has an integrated FIP port

- TSX LES 74 cable connector or 75 if the processor does not have an integrated port.

TSX LES 71 cable connector, installed on the TSX LES 120 electrical adapter module and connecting it to the processor and to a second electrical adapter module

(or TSX LFS 120/121 fiber optic adapter module). It is used as an intermediate cable connector whenever a second electrical adapter module is installed in the PLC base.

TSX LES 70 cable connector, installed on the last TSX LES 120 electrical adapter module or TSX LFS 120/121 fiber optic module and connecting it to either :

- the processor and a TSX LES 20 local rackmaster module if the PLC base has only one electrical adapter module

- the previous electrical adapter module and a TSX LES 20 local rackmaster module if the PLC base has two electrical adapter modules.

TSX CBC 003 electrical connection cable (0.35 m long) for connecting the TSX

LES 74/75 and 71/70 or TSX LES 71 and 70 cable connectors.

Tap-junction box with casing, cable and 15-pin SUB D connector for connecting the

TSX LES 120 or TSX LES 200 module to the main electrical connection cable. Two types are available :

●

TSX LES 805 with a cable 5 meters long

●

TSX LES 810 with a cable 10 meters long

TSX CB 100/200/500 main remote electrical connection cable

TSX LFS 120 fiber optic adapter module

TSX LFS 200 fiber optic rackmaster module

é pre-equipped fiber optic cable TSX CBD050 (5m) or TSX CBD 300 (30m)

FO cable splice

User-supplied FO cable

(

TSX LES 20 local rackmaster module

TSX LES 62 intermediate cable connector

TSX LES 61 end of extension cable connector

TSX CBC... connection cable.

___________________________________________________________________________

8/19

_______________________________________________________________________________________

8.4-5 Principal characteristics

Electrical bus

Maximum bus distance on a single channel base/last extension

Number of branching channels per

TSX LES 120 module

Maximum number of extensions per channel

Main cable

Performance of the electrical link for TSX LES 805 for TSX LES 810

500 meters

400 meters

Double screened twisted pair for use in a fixed installation in a covered building.

TSX CB 100 : 100 meters long

TSX CB 200 : 200 meters long

TSX CB 500 : 500 meters long

For installations requiring a cable with special characteristics (for passage out of doors, moving cable, etc), please consult your Regional Sales Office.

The data transmission rate along the serial link may allow the application to be totally independent of the chosen architecture.

Module consumption

References

TSX LES 120

TSX LES 200

Consumption per module expressed in mA

(Typical / maximum)

+5V +12VL +12VP

340/ 400 15/ 30

430/ 500 80/ 120

-12V

___________________________________________________________________________

8/20

________________________________________________________

Maximum configurations Sections 9

___________________________________________________________________________

Page

9.1

TSX or PMX 47-40 PLCs 9/2

9/2

9.1-2 With TSX P47 411 and TSX or TPM P47 4

______________________________________________________________________________________

9.2

TSX or PMX 67-40/87-40/107-40 PLCs

9.2-1 With TSX or TPMX P67 4

___________________________________________________________________________

9/1

_______________________________________________________________________________________

9.1 TSX or PMX 47-40 PLCs

9.1-1 With TSX P47 400 or TSX P47 405 processor

The maximum configuration is limited to :

●

1 basic PLC rack

●

Standard or 19" racks Short racks

0/1

2/3

Processors

Maximum discrete I/O

Intelligent modules (2)

Integrated UNI-TELWAY

Network connection

FIPWAY

TELWAY

MAPWAY/ETHWAY

No. of slots available in rack standard or 19" short

TSX P47 400

512 (1)

0 no

1 no yes no

TSX P47 405

512 (1)

0 no

1 no yes no

_________

(1) Only in standard or 19" racks and 32-channel modules.

(2) Excluding rack-mounted TELWAY network module.

___________________________________________________________________________

9/2

Maximum configurations 9

_______________________________________________________________________________________

9.1-2 With TSX P47 411 and TSX or TPMX P47 4

●

0 / P47 4

●

5 processors

The maximum configuration is limited to :

●

1 basic PLC rack A

3 direct I/O extension racks B

●

31 FIPIO connections for TBX remote I/O (only on TSX P47 415/455 and TPMX

P47 455 processors which do not have a FIPWAY network connection).

Note : the connection point at address 0 is reserved.

A C C

0/1 4 6

B B B

2/3 5 7

Remote I/O interfaces on

FIPIO bus

Processors

Max discrete I/O

(in racks and/or remote on

FIPIO bus)

Intelligent modules (2)

Integrated UNI-TELWAY

Network connection

FIPWAY

TELWAY

MAPWAY/ETHWAY

No. of slots available in rack standard or 19" short

TSX TSX TSX TSX or TPMX TSX or TPMX

P47 410 P47 411 P47 415 P47 420/425 P47 455

1024 (1) 1024(1) 1024 (1) 1024 (1) 1024 no no yes no

1 yes

1 no yes no

1 no

1 yes yes no

1 yes

1 no yes yes

4 no

1 yes yes yes

40 40 40 40 40

_________

(1) Only in racks.

(2) Excluding rack-mounted (TELWAY, MAPWAY, ETHWAY) and integrated (FIPWAY) network

9/3

_______________________________________________________________________________________

The maximum configuration is limited to :

●

1 basic PLC rack A

●

7 direct I/O extension racks

6 local or remote I/O extension racks C

●

62 FIPIO connection points for TBX remote I/O (with TSX or TPMX P67 455/P87 455/

P107 455 processors which do not have a FIPWAY network connection).

Note : The connection points at addresses 0 and 63 are reserved.

A C C

0/1 4 A

2/3

Remote I/O interfaces on FIPIO bus

C C

6 C

B B

7 D

C C

8 E

FIPIO bus

B B

9 F

___________________________________________________________________________

9/4

Maximum configurations 9

_______________________________________________________________________________________

Processors

Max discrete I/O

(in racks and/or remote on FIPIO bus)

Intelligent modules (2)

Integrated UNI-TELWAY

Network connection

FIPWAY

TELWAY

MAPWAY/ETHWAY

No. of slots available in rack standard or 19"

TSX

P67 410

2048 (1)

16 no

2 no yes yes

112

TSX or TPMX

P67 420/425

2048 (1)

16 yes

2 no yes yes

112

TSX or TPMX

P67 455

2048

16 no

2 yes yes yes

112

Processors

Max discrete I/O

(in racks and/or remote on FIPIO bus)

Intelligent modules (2)

Integrated UNI-TELWAY

Network connection

FIPWAY

TELWAY

MAPWAY/ETHWAY

No. of slots available in rack standard or 19"

TSX

P87 410

2048 (1)

32 no

4 no yes yes

112

TSX or TPMX

P87 420/425

2048 (1)

32 yes

4 no yes yes

112

TSX or TPMX

P87 455

2048

32 no

4 yes yes yes

112

Processors

Max discrete I/O

(in racks and/or remote on FIPIO bus)

Intelligent modules (2)

Integrated UNI-TELWAY

Network connection

FIPWAY

TELWAY

MAPWAY/ETHWAY

No. of slots available in rack standard or 19"

TSX

P107 410

2048 (1)

56 no

4 no yes yes

112

TSX or TPMX

P107 420/425

2048 (1)

56 yes

4 no yes yes

112

TSX or TPMX

P107 455

2048

56 no

4 yes yes yes

112

________

(1) Only in racks.

(2) Excluding rack-mounted (TELWAY, MAPWAY, ETHWAY) and integrated (FIPWAY) network modules.

___________________________________________________________________________

9/5

_______________________________________________________________________________________

___________________________________________________________________________

9/6

________________________________________________________

Rack-mounted discrete Section 10

10.1

Description

Page

______________________________________________________________________________________

10.2

Range of discrete I/O interface modules 10/8

10/8

10/9

10/10

______________________________________________________________________________________

10.3

Input characteristics 10/11

10/11

10.3-2 Characteristics of 24 VDC inputs : 10/12

10.3-3 Characteristics of 48 V/110-120 VDC inputs : 10/14

10.3-8 Characteristics of 110/127 VAC inputs : TSX DET 8 24/16 04 10/20

10/21

____________________________________________________________________________________

10.4

Output characteristics 10/22

10.4-2 Characteristics of 24 VDC solid state outputs :

10/22

10/23

10/27

10.4-6 Characteristics of 110/127 VAC solid state outputs : 10/31

___________________________________________________________________________

10/1

_______________________________________________________________________________________

The discrete input modules perform the following functions :

●

Signal matching

●

Electrical isolation

Filtering and protection against unwanted signals

Acquisition of sensor states.

The discrete output modules perform the following functions :

●

Memorizing commands from the processor

Control of preactuators through decoupling and amplification circuits.

Telemecanique's wide range of discrete I/O modules enables users to fulfil the requirements of all kinds of industrial application :

● functionality (I/O may be DC, AC, Namur, etc),

● modularity (4, 8, 16, 24, or 32 channels).

____________________________________________________________________

10.1-1 Physical appearance

4, 8, and 16-channel modules with TSX BLK 1/BLK 2/BLK 3 terminal blocks

Each module is in the form of a rectangular case which isolates and protects the electronic components. The module is connected to the sensors and preactuators via a screw connection terminal 1 of the type TSX BLK 1, BLK 2 or BLK 3.

On the front panel are :

2 Status lamps indicating the state of each channel.

3 Fault lamps : 1 per channel in the case of

TSX DET 4 66 and TSX

DST 4 17 modules; 1 per module in the case of 8-channel output modules.

4 Hatch closed by a flap which allows access to the protective fuses fitted in some output modules.

___________________________________________________________________________

10/2

Rack-mounted discrete I/O interfaces 10

_______________________________________________________________________________________

24 and 32-channel modules

Each module is in the form of a rectangular case which isolates and protects the electronic components.

The module is connected to the sensors and preactuators either :

● via a screw connection terminal 1 :TSX BLK 7, BLK 8 or BLK 9 depending on the type of module, or

● via a terminal block 1 with connectors of the type HE10 : TSX BLK71, BLK 81 or

BLK 91 depending on the type of module. This type of connector is used with the

TELEFAST system as a means of quick connection between PLC discrete I/O and

ABE-6•• modules for discrete signals.

On the front panel are :

2 female connectors for attaching the terminal block.

The state of each channel is displayed by indicator lamps located on the terminal block.

2 1

____________________________________________________________________

10.1-2 Installation

4, 8, and 16-channel modules

These modules can be installed in all types of racks in the slots numbered 0 to 7.

The locating devices on the backplane of the rack must be set to the code number of the module.

___________________________________________________________________________

10/3

_______________________________________________________________________________________

24 and 32-channel modules

These modules can be installed in :

0 to 7.

In this case the corresponding slots in the associated direct extension racks cannot be used.

B B

____________________________________________________________________

10.1-3 Special functions

●

Installation and removal of discrete I/O modules while under power

Hardware security : Special built-in devices enable the I/O modules and their terminal blocks to be removed under power and even when loaded, without risk of destruction.

Software security : The processor is informed of the absence of a terminal block or module by the setting to state 1 of the status bit (I/Oxy,S) which can be exploited by the program.

●

I/O fault information

The I/O fault lamp on the front of the processor comes on when any of the following faults occur in the I/O modules :

- incorrect configuration

- incorrect data exchange

- removal of a terminal block or module

- overcurrent on the outputs.

___________________________________________________________________________

10/4

Rack-mounted discrete I/O interfaces 10

_______________________________________________________________________________________

In addition, the user has access to specific I/O system bits.

The analysis and processing of all these bits (system and status) in the user program suppresses any transitory events caused by the anomaly which might prove dangerous to the application. The bits also authorize programming of downgraded operation for the application.

Connecting sensors and preactuators to TSX BLK1, BLK2, BLK3, BLK7, BLK8 and BLK9 screw terminals.

These are connected to removable screw terminals, each of which has a clamping capacity of 1 wire of 2.5 mm 2 or 2 flexible 1.5 mm 2 wires.

The plug-in nature of these terminal blocks means they can be installed or removed without being unwired.

4 or 8-channel interface modules :

These modules can be connected in three different ways depending on the terminal block used

- Independent channels : no connection between channels

- Two wires per channel: use of commons integrated in the terminal block

- External commons : to be created on an intermediate terminal block.

16, 24 or 32-channel interface modules :

These modules can only accept external commons.

AL AL

● raccordement indépendant

• Connection of each channel to

● raccordement de chaque

● voie au bornier par 2 fils.

communs d'alimentation channel

• Connection of each channel to

● raccordement de chaque the terminal block by 1 wire

● voie au bornier par 1 fil.

communs d'alimentation

___________________________________________________________________________

10/5

_______________________________________________________________________________________

● blocks fitted with HE10 connectors.

The TELEFAST system provides quick connection of discrete 24 and 32-channel base units with electromechanical and transistor relays and terminal blocks fitted with connectors. Components are interconnected by means of prefabricated cables of the rolled insulated wire type, fitted with self-stripping connectors.

TSX BLK

●

★

24 V

ABE-6EST320

8…F

0…7

ABE-6EST 320 ABE-6HE2031

- - +

24 V

ABE-6HE2031

1 2

3 4

5 6

7 8

9 A

B C

D E

24 V

ABE-6HE1031

0 1

2 3

4 5

6 7

- - +

1.4

1.5

1.3

1.4

1.5

1.3

1.4

1.5

1.3

ABE-6HE1031 ABE-6R08S43

___________________________________________________________________________

10/6

Rack-mounted discrete I/O interfaces 10

_______________________________________________________________________________________

10.1-4 Identification

Due to the wide range of modules and the different terminal blocks which can be used, it is necessary to identify on the labels provided on the front of each terminal block :

- the type of module

- the number of the slot occupied by the module within the configuration

- the mnemonic of each channel used.

●

4/8/16 discrete I/O interface modules

Each terminal block is delivered with two printed labels, printed on both sides, which

● allow the I/O to be identified according to the type of interface module used : 4 inputs or 4 outputs and 8 or 16 I/O.

24 and 32 discrete I/O interface modules

Each terminal block is delivered with one printed label.

In the centre of each label is a colour-coded rectangle

for identifying the type of module and its slot number in the configuration.

The colour of this rectangle must be the same as the identification label on the module itself 2 which is visible :

● through the openings at the top and bottom of the terminal block when its cover is open, in the case of the interface modules with 4/8/16 discrete I/O.

● when the terminal block is removed, in the case of interface modules with 24 and 32 discrete I/O.

TSX DET 16 12

16 Entrées regroup 24 VCC

TSX DET 16 12

16 Entrées grouped 24 VCC

Colour coding :

Couleur encadré :

Black : 4 inputs

Noir : 4 E

Green : 4 outputs

___________________________________________________________________________

10/7

_______________________________________________________________________________________

10.2-1 Discrete input interface modules

DC discrete input interface modules

Input voltage

24 VDC

48 VDC

110/120 VDC

130 VDC

Modularity

Compatibility with Characteristic Reference

CENELEC sensors (see page)

Namur sensors 10/16 TSX DET 4 66 yes yes yes yes

10/12

10/13

TSX DET 8 12

TSX DET 16 12

TSX DET 32 32

TSX DET 32 42 no (1) yes yes yes yes

10/13

10/14

10/15

TSX DET 32 52

TSX DET 8 13

TSX DET 16 13

TSX DET 8 24

TSX DET 8 14

AC input interface modules 50-60 Hz

Input voltage

24 VAC

Modularity

42/48 VAC

48 VAC

110/120 VAC

115 VAC

220/240 VAC (4) 8

Compatibility with Characteristic Reference

CENELEC sensors (see page) no (2) 10/18 TSX DET 8 02 yes no (3) yes yes yes

10/19

10/20

10/21

TSX DET 8 03

TSX DET 16 03

TSX DET 16 04

TSX DET 8 24

TSX DET 8 05

_________

(1) Compatible with Telemecanique 3-wire DC proximity sensor.

(2) Compatible with Telemecanique non-polarized 2-wire DC proximity sensor.

(3) Compatible with Telemecanique 2-wire AC proximity sensor.

10/8

Rack-mounted discrete I/O interfaces 10

_______________________________________________________________________________________

10.2-2 Discrete output interface modules

DC discrete output interface modules (solid state outputs)

Output voltage

5/12/24 VDC

24 VDC

24/48 VDC

Modularity

16 (1)

8 (2)

Type of channels

0.4A-24V non protected

2A protected

0.5A protected

0.4A protected

0.5A protected

0.1A non protected

2A protected

0.5A protected

AC output interface modules (solid state outputs)

Characteristic Reference

(see page)

10/27 TSX DST 16 12

10/23

10/25

10/26

10/28

TSX DST 8 82

TSX DST 16 82

TSX DST 24 82

TSX DST 24 72

TSX DST 32 92

TSX DST 4 17

TSX DST 8 17

Output voltage

110/127 VAC

110/120 VAC

110/240 VAC

Modularity

Type of channels

2A protected

0.5A non protected

2A protected

Characteristic.

Reference

(see page)

10/31 TSX DST 8 04

10/31 TSX DST 16 04

10/32 TSX DST 8 05

DC and/or AC output interface modules (relay outputs)

Modularity Output voltage

24 to 240 VAC

24 VDC

24 to 240 VAC

24 VDC

48 to 130 VDC

8 relays

16 relays

Type of channels

1 N/O protected

1 N/O + N/C

Characterist

(see page)

10/33

10/29

1 N/O non-protected 10/33

1 N/O non-protected 10/34

1 N/O non-protected 10/30

Reference

TSX DST 8 35

TSX DST 16 35

TSX DST 16 33

TSX DST 16 32

TSX DST 16 34

_________

(1) Negative logic.

10/9

_______________________________________________________________________________________

10.2-3 Terminal blocks

Type of terminal block Screw terminals

Type of connection

4-channel module

8-channel module

16-channel module

32-channel input module -

Independent channels

TSX BLK 1

24-channel output module -

32-channel output module -

Terminal blocks with

HE10 connectors for TELEFAST

system (1)

Two wires External per channel commons

TSX BLK 2 TSX BLK 1 -

TSX BLK 3

TSX BLK 1 -

TSX BLK 7 BLK 71

TSX BLK 8 BLK 81

TSX BLK 9 BLK 91

Note :

TSX DST 8 17/8 82 modules cannot be used with independent channels.

The wiring diagrams are given in section 4.3, divider B

_________

(1) The TELEFAST system is a group of products which enable quick connection of discrete I/O

24 and 32-channel cards to ABE-6

●●●●

discrete signals interfaces.

___________________________________________________________________________

10/10

Rack-mounted discrete I/O interfaces 10

_______________________________________________________________________________________

10.3-1 Characteristics common to the inputs

Characteristics common to the inputs

- Installation and removal with the PLC energized

- Display of the state of each input (sensor side).

External line

●

Line resistance

Resistance to open circuit leak

- 500 Ohms

- 1000 Ohms for TSX DET 8 14

• 30 Kohms

• 60 Kohms for TSX DET 8 05/8 14

Isolation

●

Between channels or group of channels (1) 1500 V rms 50 - 60 Hz

●

Between channels and internal bus (1)

Type

1500 V rms 50 - 60 Hz optical coupler

Temperature

●

Operating temperature

●

Storage temperature

5 to 55°C

-25°C to + 70°C

__________

(1) Excluding TSX DET 32 52, non-isolated inputs.

___________________________________________________________________________

10/11

_______________________________________________________________________________________

10.3-2 Characteristics of 24 VDC inputs : TSX DET 8 12/16 12/32 32/32 42/32 52

Interface modules

Nominal input values

● voltage

● current

● sensor voltage (including ripple)

Limit input values

● at state 1

● at state 0 voltage current voltage

● permanent inverse voltage current

♦ maximum voltage for 1 min

Input impedance

♦

Response time from state 0 to state 1

♦ from state 1 to state 0

Coupling capacity with 220 VAC

Power dissipation per channel at state 1

Current draw

on internal 12 V (12 VL)

Inputs commoned

Logic

Code number

TSX DET 8 12

24 VDC

16.5 mA

19.2 to 30 VDC

> 11 VDC

> 6 mA

- 5 VDC

> 11 VDC

> 6 mA

- 5 VDC

- 2.5 mA

30 VDC

- 2.5 mA

30 VDC

± 48 VDC ± 48 VDC

1380 to 1520 Ohms 1380 to 1520 Ohms

5 to 8 ms

2.5 to 4 ms

30 nF max

0.43 W

14 mA max

TSX DET 16 12

24 VDC

16.5 mA

19.2 to 30 VDC

5 to 20 ms

2.5 to 10 ms

30 nF max

0.43 W

14 mA max to the + of the power supply positive with current sink (1)

32 56

Status word

Compatibility with proximity sensors

Compatibility with output modules

0B10 0000 0B11 1000

All Telemecanique 2 or 3-wire types

TSX DST 417/817

TSX DST 835/882

TSX DST 1612

TSX DST 1682

TSX DST 2472

TSX DST 2482

TSX DST 3292

_________

(1) Negative logic, with current source possible for TSX DET 8 12 wired with independent channels

(TSX BLK1).

___________________________________________________________________________

10/12

Rack-mounted discrete I/O interfaces 10

_______________________________________________________________________________________

Characteristics of 24 VDC inputs (contd)

Interface modules TSX DET 32 32

TSX DET 32 42

TSX DET 32 52

Nominal input values

● voltage

● current

● sensor voltage (including ripple)

Inputs commoned

Logic

Code number

24 VDC

7 mA

19.2 to 30 VDC

Limit input values

● at state 1 voltage current voltage

● at state 0

● permanent inverse voltage current

> 11 VDC

> 5 mA

< 5 VDC

●

● maximum voltage for 1 min

Input impedance

Response time

● from state 0 to state 1 from state 1 to state 0

< 2.5 mA

30 VDC

± 48 VDC

3400 Ohms

TSX DET 32 32 2 to 4.5 ms

TSX DET 32 42 6 to 10 ms

TSX DET 32 32 2.5 to 4.5 ms

TSX DET 32 42 6 to 10 ms

30 nF max Coupling capacity with 220 VAC

Power dissipation per channel at state 1

Current draw

on internal 12 V (12 VL)

0.17W

45 mA max

24 VDC

7 mA

19.2 to 30 VDC

11 to 30 VDC

1.7 to 8.8 mA

-30 to 5 VDC

- 10.3 to 0.98 mA

30 VDC

± 48 VDC

3400 to 4200 Ohms

7 to 20 ms

6 to 19 ms

30 nF max

0.16 W

11 mA max to the + of the power supply positive with current sink

56 56

Status word

Type of inputs

Compatibility with proximity sensors

Compatibility with output modules

0B11 1000

IEC 65A Type 2

2 and 3-wire

CENELEC sensors

TSX DST 2472

TSX DST 2482

TSX DST 3292

0B11 1100

IEC 65A Type 1

TSX DST 2472

TSX DST 2482

TSX DST 3292

___________________________________________________________________________

10/13

_______________________________________________________________________________________

10.3-3 Characteristics of 48/110-120 VDC inputs : TSX DET 8 13/8 24/16 13

Interface modules TSX DET 8 13

TSX DET 16 13

TSX DET 8 24

Nominal input values

● voltage

● current

● sensor voltage (including ripple)

Limit input values

● at state 1

● at state 0 voltage current voltage current

● permanent inverse voltage

● maximum voltage for 1 min

Input impedance

Response time

● from state 0 to state 1

TSX DET 813

TSX DET 1613

48 VDC

10.5 mA

38 to 60 VDC

> 30 VDC

> 6 mA

- 12 VDC

5 to 8 ms

5 to 20 ms

110/120 VDC

13.6 mA

86 to 132 VDC

> 77 VDC

> 8.5 mA

- 35 VDC

- 2.5 mA

60 VDC

- 3.5 mA

132 VDC

± 110 VDC ± 220 VDC

4275 to 4720 Ohms 8000 to 9000 Ohms

8.7 to 13.8 ms

● from state 1 to state 0

TSX DET 813 2.5 to 4 ms

TSX DET 1613 2.5 to 10 ms

30 nF max

16.7 to 26.3 ms

40 nF max Coupling capacity with 220 VAC

Power dissipation per channel at state 1

Current draw on internal 12 V (12 VL)

Inputs commoned

Logic

Code number

Status word

0.52 W 1.5 W

DET 813

DET 1613

11 mA max

13 mA max

14 mA max to the + of the power supply positive with current sink (1)

TSX DET 813 33

TSX DET 1612 58

TSX DET 813 0B10 0001

0B10 0100

TSX DET 1613 0B11 1010

All Telemecanique 2 or 3-wire types Compatibility with proximity sensors

Compatibility with output modules

TSX DST 8 17

TSX DST 4 17

_________

(1) Negative logic, with current source possible for TSX DET 8 13/8 24 wired with independent channels (TSX BLK1).

___________________________________________________________________________

10/14

Rack-mounted discrete I/O interfaces 10

_______________________________________________________________________________________

10.3-4 Characteristics of 130 VDC inputs : TSX DET 8 14

Interface modules

Nominal input values

●

● voltage current

● sensor voltage (including ripple)

Limit input values

● at state 1 voltage current

●

● at state 0 voltage current permanent inverse voltage maximum voltage for 1 min

Input impedance

Response time

●

● from state 0 to state 1 5 to 8 ms from state 1 to state 0 2.5 to 4 ms

Coupling capacity with 220 VAC

Power dissipation per channel at state 1

Current draw on internal 12 V (12 VL)

Inputs commoned

Logic

Code number

Status word

Compatibility with output modules

TSX DET 8 14

130 VDC

11.2 mA

100 to 142 VDC

> 88 VDC

> 8 mA

< 25 VDC

< 2.2 mA

142 VDC

± 156 VDC

11600 to 12800 Ohms

30 nF max

1.46 W

11 mA maximum to the + of the power supply positive with current sink

0B10 0110

TSX DST 16 34

___________________________________________________________________________

10/15

_______________________________________________________________________________________

10.3-5 Characteristics of Namur inputs : TSX DET 4 66

The TSX DET 4 66 interface module has four inputs for receiving signals from Namur type proximity sensors. Each channel is also equipped with a line monitoring circuit which detects breaks or short-circuits.

TSX DET 4 66 Interface module

Nominal input values

● voltage

● current

● sensor voltage (including ripple)

Limit input values

●

● at state 1 at state 0 current current

Response time

● from state 0 to state 1

● from state 1 to state 0

Current draw

on internal 12 V (12 VL)

Status display

Fault display

Namur (7 to 12 VDC)

4 mA

17 to 30 VDC

2.1 to 9 mA

0 to 1.2 mA

0.5 to 2 ms

10 mA

1 LED per channel, on at state 1

1 LED per channel, on if there is a cut line or short-circuit

7.7 to 9 VDC

950 to 1050 Ohms

- 50 Ohms

No-load voltage of inputs

Internal resistance

Serial resistance of wires

Parallel resistance of wires

Fault detection current

● broken line

● short-circuit

Fault detection resistance

● broken line

● short-circuit

Code number

Status word

Compatibility with proximity sensors

• 100 Kohms

0.15 mA max

6 mA min

85 Kohms min

150 Ohms max

0B10 0111

Telemecanique Namur sensors

___________________________________________________________________________

10/16

Rack-mounted discrete I/O interfaces 10

_______________________________________________________________________________________

Characteristics of Namur inputs (contd)

The Namur inputs can be used with dry contacts equipped with a serial resistance and a parallel resistance as shown in the diagram below.

+ AL

E (n)

2,2K

Ω

12K

Ω

___________________________________________________________________________

10/17

_______________________________________________________________________________________

10.3-6 Characteristics of 24 VAC inputs : TSX DET 8 02

Interface module

Nominal input values

● voltage

● current

● frequency

● sensor voltage

Limit input values

● at state 1

TSX DET 8 02

24 VAC

21.5 mA

50 - 60 Hz

20.4 to 26.5 VAC

● at state 0 voltage current voltage current

> 12 VAC

> 7.6 mA

- 5 VAC

- 3 mA

47 to 63 Hz

1100 to 1250 Ohms

● frequency

Input impedance

Response time

● from state 0 to state 1

● from state 1 to state 0

Coupling capacity

● open line

● open line with 220 VAC

Power dissipation per channel at state 1

Current draw

on internal 12 V (12 VL)

Code number

Status word

Compatibility with proximity sensors

Compatibility with output modules

11 to 20 ms

14 to 23 ms

300 nF max

30 nF max

0.35 W

13 mA max

0B10 0010 no

TSX DST 8 35

TSX DST 16 35

___________________________________________________________________________

10/18

Rack-mounted discrete I/O interfaces 10

_______________________________________________________________________________________

10.3-7 Characteristics of 48 VAC inputs : TSX DET 8 03/16 03

Interface modules

Nominal input values

● voltage

● current

● frequency

● sensor voltage

Limit input values

● at state 1

TSX DET 8 03

42 - 48 VAC

18 - 20.5 mA

50 - 60 Hz

35.7 to 53 VAC

TSX DET 16 03

48 VAC

22 to 26 mA

50 - 60 Hz

40 to 53 VAC

● at state 0 voltage current voltage current

> 25 VAC

> 8 mA

- 11 VAC

- 3 mA

47 to 63 Hz

2100 to 2400 Ohms

> 30 VAC

> 16 mA

- 14 VAC

- 6 mA

47 to 63 Hz

1500 to 3000 Ohms

● frequency

Input impedance

Response time

● from state 0 to state 1

● from state 1 to state 0

Coupling capacity

● open line

● open line with 220 VAC

Power dissipation per channel at state 1

Current draw

on internal 12 V (12 VL)

Code number

Status word

Compatibility with proximity sensors

Compatibility with output modules

12 to 21 ms

12 to 22 ms

220 nF max

30 nF max

1 W

13 mA max

0B10 0011

0B11 1011

All Telemecanique 2 and 3-wire types

TSX DST 8 35

TSX DST 16 35

11 to 32 ms

10 to 22 ms

420 nF max

80 nF max

0.5 W

35 mA max

TSX DST 8 35

TSX DST 16 35

___________________________________________________________________________

10/19

_______________________________________________________________________________________

10.3-8 Characteristics of 110/127 VAC inputs : TSX DET 8 24/16 04

Interface modules

Nominal input values

● voltage

● current

● frequency

● sensor voltage

Limit input values

● at state 1

TSX DET 16 04

110 - 120 VAC

16 - 20.5 mA

50 - 60 Hz

93.5 to 132 VAC

TSX DET 8 24

115 VAC

13.6 mA

50 - 60 Hz

93.5 to 132 VAC

● at state 0 voltage current voltage current

> 74 VAC

> 6 mA

- 20 VAC

- 4 mA

47 to 63 Hz

5500 to 7800 Ohms

> 75 VAC

> 8 mA

- 33 VAC

- 3.5 mA

47 to 63 Hz

8000 to 8900 Ohms

● frequency

Input impedance

Response time

● from state 0 to state 1

● from state 1 to state 0

Coupling capacity

● open line

● open line with 220 VAC

Power dissipation per channel at state 1

Current draw

on internal 12 V (12 VL)

Code number

Status word

Compatibility with proximity sensors

Compatibility with output modules

12 to 23 ms

12 to 22 ms

100 nF max

40 nF max

0.30 W

35 mA max

0B11 1011

0B10 0100

All Telemecanique 2 and 3-wire types

TSX DST 8 04

TSX DST 8 35

TSX DST 16 04

TSX DST 16 35

11 to 22 ms

12 to 23 ms

100 nF max

40 nF max

1.45 W

13 mA max

TSX DST 8 04

TSX DST 8 35

TSX DST 16 04

TSX DST 16 35

___________________________________________________________________________

10/20

Rack-mounted discrete I/O interfaces 10

_______________________________________________________________________________________

10.3-9 Characteristics of 220-240 VAC inputs : TSX DET 8 05

Interface module

Nominal input values

● voltage

● current

● frequency

● sensor voltage

Limit input values

● at state 1

TSX DET 8 05

220 - 240 VAC

14.5 to 15.8 mA

50 Hz

187 to 264 V

● at state 0 voltage current voltage current

> 154 VAC

> 9.4 mA

- 67 VAC

- 4.9 mA

47 to 53 Hz

1440 to 1600 Ohms

● frequency

Input impedance

Response time

● from state 0 to state 1

● from state 1 to state 0

Coupling capacity

● open line

● open line with 220 VAC

Power dissipation per channel at state 1

Current draw

on internal 12 V (12 VL)

Code number

Status word

Compatibility with proximity sensors

Compatibility with output modules

12 to 28.6 ms

12 to 22 ms

80 nF max

0.5 W

13 mA max

0B100101

All Telemecanique 2 and 3-wire types

TSX DST 8 05

TSX DST 8 35

TSX DST 16 35

___________________________________________________________________________

10/21

_______________________________________________________________________________________

10.4-1 Characteristics common to outputs

●

Installation and removal with the PLC energized.

Display of the state of the output (PLC side).

Loads

Fault display

Isolation

● between channels or group of channels 1500 V rms 50 - 60 Hz

● between channels and internal bus 1500 V rms 50 - 60 Hz

● type by optical coupler : TSX DST 16 12/8 82/

16 82/24 82/24 72./32 92/4 17/8 17/8 05.

by optotriac : TSX DST 8 04/16 04.

by relay : TSX DST 8 35/16 35/16 32/16 33/16 34

Temperature resistive or inductive except for

SX DST 8 04/1604 (inductive only)

1 LED on front panel except for

TSX DST 4 17 (4 LEDs)

● operating

● storage

5 to 55°C

-25°C to +70°C

___________________________________________________________________________

10/22

Rack-mounted discrete I/O interfaces 10

_______________________________________________________________________________________

10.4-2 Characteristics of 24 VDC solid state outputs :

TSX DST 8 82/16 82/24 72/24 82 and TSX DST 3292

Interface modules

Loads

● voltage

● nominal current

● limitation and detection current

● tungsten filament lamp

Limit values

● voltage (including ripple) 19.2 to 30 VDC

● permanent current 2.2 A max

● total current at 25°C at 60°C

TSX DST 8 82

24 VDC

2 A

2.8 A

4 W max

19.2 to 30 VDC

0.6 A max

8 channels at 2 A

8 channels at 1.5 A

4 channels at 2 A

TSX DST 16 82

24 VDC

0.5 A

1 A to 25°C

0.8 A to 55°C

2 W max

< 8 A

< 4 A

Response time on resistive load

● from state 0 to state 1

● from state 1 to state 0

Leakage current at state 0

Residual voltage at state 1

Built-in protection against

● overloads and short-circuits

● resetting time after clearing the short-circuit

● overvoltages

● polarity inversions

0.2 ms max

0.5 ms max

2 mA max

1.8 V max

0.2 ms max

2 mA max

1.2 V max

1 self-resetting power limiter per channel

< 30 ms < 100 ms discharge diode and GMOV peak limiter inverse parallel diode (fuse (1) required on external power supply)

Current draw

● external 24 V

● internal 12 V 12 VL

12 VP

20 mA + 10 mA per channel on short-circuit

20 mA 50 mA

10 mA/channel at 1 + 8 mA/channel at 1 +

10 mA if faulty 10 mA if faulty

_________

10/23

_______________________________________________________________________________________

Characteristics of 24 VDC solid state outputs (contd)

Interface modules

Loads commoned to

Logic

Code number

Status word

Compatibility with input modules

Capacity of the external supply

● single phase 2 halfwaves

●

3-phase 2 halfwaves

TSX DST 8 82 the - of the power supply positive with current source

DB01 0111

TSX DET 8 12

TSX DET 16 12

2000 µN/O/A

500 µN/O/A

TSX DST 16 82 the - of the power supply positive with current source

DB11 0101

TSX DET 8 12

TSX DET 16 12

2000 µN/O/A

500 µN/O/A

Temperature derating for TSX DST 8 82 interface module

Module current (A)

2A/channel

1.9A/channel

1.8A/channel

1.7A/channel

1.6A/channel

25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 T(*c)

Example : at 50°C

- I = 1.7A/channel; a maximum of 13 A in the module must not be exceeded, ie 7 out of 8 channels on at the same time.

- I = 2A/channel; a maximum of 10.5A in the module must not be exceeded, ie 5 out of 8 channels on at the same time.

___________________________________________________________________________

10/24

Rack-mounted discrete I/O interfaces 10

_______________________________________________________________________________________

Characteristics of 24 VDC solid state outputs (contd)

Interface modules

Loads

● voltage

● nominal current

● tungsten filament lamp

Limit values

● voltage (including ripple)

Response time on resistive load

● from state 0 to state 1

● from state 1 to state 0

Leakage current at state 0

TSX DST 24 82

24 VDC

400 mA max

5W max

19.2 to 30 VDC

20 µs max

30 µs max

0.1 mA max

1.2 V max

TSX DST 24 72

24 VDC

500 mA

8W max

19.2 to 30 VDC

10 µs typical

50 µs typical

1 mA max

0.4 mA typical

1.2 V max Residual voltage at state 1

Built-in protection against

● overloads and short-circuits

● overvoltages

● polarity inversion thermal protection on cut-out per channel per pair of channels

DC current

= 800 mA

DC current

= 1.5 A discharge diode inverse parallel diode and external fuse diode in series with the - of the power supply

Current draw on

● internal 12 V 12 VL

12 VP

Loads commoned to

Logic

Code number

Status word

Compatibility with input modules

60 mA +5 mA/channel at 1 43 mA

— the - of the power supply

5 mA/channel at 1 positive with current source

53 53

DB11 0101

TSX DET 32 32

TSX DET 32 42

TSX DET 32 52

DB11 0101

TSX DET 32 32

TSX DET 32 42

TSX DET 32 52

Capacity of the external supply

● single phase 2 halfwaves

●

3-phase 2 halfwaves

Limit current per group of channels at 25°C at 55°C

2000 µN/O/A

500 µN/O/A

2.4 A / 6 channels

1.2 A / 6 channels

2000 µN/O/A

500 µN/O/A

0.8 A / 2 channels

0.5 A / 2 channels

___________________________________________________________________________

10/25

_______________________________________________________________________________________

Characteristics of 24 VDC solid state outputs (contd)

Interface module

Loads

● voltage

● nominal current

● tungsten filament lamp

Limit values

● voltage (including ripple)

Response time on resistive load

● from state 0 to state 1

● from state 1 to state 0

Leakage current at state 0

Residual voltage at state 1

Built-in protection against

● overloads and short-circuits

● overvoltages

● polarity inversion

Current draw on

● internal 12 V 12 VL

12 VP

Loads commoned to

Logic

Code number

Status word

Compatibility with input modules

TSX DST 32 92

24 VDC

100 mA

1 W max

19.2 to 30 VDC

20 µs max

30 µs max

0.1 mA max

2 V max none (400 mA quick-acting fuse required in series for each channel) discharge diode inverse parallel diode and external fuse

60 mA

5 mA/channel at 1

(1) the - of the power supply positive with current source

DB11 0101

TSX DET 32 32

TSX DET 32 42

TSX DET 32 52

Capacity of the external supply

● single phase 2 halfwaves

●

3-phase 2 halfwaves

Limit current per group of channels at 55°C

2000 µN/O/A

500 µN/O/A

0.5 A

2000 µN/O/A

500 µN/O/A

_________

(1) TSX DST 32 92 consumption with interchangeability index II • 04.

If II < 04, its consumption is : on 12 VL : 60 mA + 5mA/channel at 1 on 12 VP: 0

___________________________________________________________________________

10/26

Rack-mounted discrete I/O interfaces 10

_______________________________________________________________________________________

10.4-3 5/12/24 VDC solid state outputs : TSX DST 16 12

Interface module

Loads

● voltage

● nominal current

● tungsten filament lamp

Limit values

● voltage (including ripple)

Response time on resistive load

● from state 0 to state 1

● from state 1 to state 0

Leakage current at state 0

Residual voltage at state 10.2 V

Built-in protection against

● overloads

● overvoltages

● polarity inversion

TSX DST 16 12

5 VDC

60 mA

4.5 to 30 VDC

50 µs

250 µs

10 µA

0.3 V

12 VDC

200 mA

25 µA

0.4 V

24 VDC

400 mA

5 W

50 µA none (1) discharge diode and GMOV peak limiter inverse parallel diode (10 A fuse required on external power supply)

Current draw on

● external 5 V

● external 24 V

● external 48 V

● internal 12 V 12 VL

12 VP

Loads commoned to

Logic

Code number

Status word

Compatibility with input modules

Capacity of the external power supply

● single phase 2 halfwaves

●

3-phase 2 halfwaves

16 mA/4 channels

42 mA/4 channels

83 mA/4 channels

30 mA

8 mA per channel at 1 the + of the power supply negative, with current sink

0B11 0101

TSX DET 8 12

TSX DET 16 12

2000 µN/O/A

500 µN/O/A

_________

(1) Fit a quick-acting fuse (rated 1 A) in series on each channel or group of channels.

___________________________________________________________________________

10/27

_______________________________________________________________________________________

10.4-4 Characteristics of 24 - 48 VDC solid state outputs : TSX DST 4 17/8 17

Interface modules

Loads

● voltage

● nominal current

● limitation and detection current

● tungsten filament lamp

TSX DST 4 17

24 - 48 VDC

2 A

2.5 A to 25°C

2.7 A to 55°C

24 VDC : 15W max

48 VDC : 30W max

TSX DST 8 17

24 - 48 VDC

0.5 A

1 A to 25°C

0.8 A to 55°C

24 VDC : 10W max

48 VDC : 20W max

Limit values

● voltage (including ripple)

Response time on resistive load

● from state 0 to state 1

● from state 1 to state 0

Leakage current at state 0

Residual voltage at state 1

Built-in protection against

● overloads

● overvoltages

● polarity inversion

Current draw on

● external 24 V

● external 48 V

● internal 12 V 12 VL

12 VP

Loads commoned to

Logic

Code number

Status word

Compatibility with input modules

19.2 to 60 VDC

3.5 ms max

0.2 ms

2 mA max

2 V max

19.2 to 60 VDC

0.2 ms

2 mA max

1.3 V max power limiter discharge diode and GMOV peak limiter inverse parallel diode

9 mA/channel

21 mA/channel

30 mA

24 mA/4 channels

30 mA/4 channels

24 mA

10 mA/channel at 1 the - of the power supply

8 mA/channel at 1 positive with current source

04 29

DB00 0100

TSX DET 8 12

TSX DET 8 13

TSX DET 16 12

TSX DET 16 13

DB01 1101

TSX DET 8 12

TSX DET 8 13

TSX DET 16 12

TSX DET 16 13

Capacity of the external power supply

● single phase 2 halfwaves

●

3-phase 2 halfwaves

2000 µN/O/A

500 µN/O/A

2000 µN/O/A

500 µN/O/A

___________________________________________________________________________

10/28

Rack-mounted discrete I/O interfaces 10

_______________________________________________________________________________________

10.4-5 Characteristics of DC relay outputs : TSX DST 8 35/16 32/16 34

Interface module

Loads

● voltage

● nominal current

● tungsten filament lamp

Limit values

● voltage (including ripple)

Response time on resistive load

● from state 0 to state 1

● from state 1 to state 0

Built-in protection against

● overloads and short-circuits

● overvoltages

Current draw on

● internal 12 V 12 VL

12 VP

Code number

Status word

Compatibility with input modules

TSX DST 8 35

24 VDC

1 A

19 to 30 VDC

3 to 15 ms

3 to 18 ms integrated 3.15 A fuses none, external discharge diode required

24 mA

50 mA/channel at 1

DB01 1000

TSX DET 8 12

TSX DET 8 02

TSX DET 16 12

Important

The TSX DST 8 35 relay output module can be used with either DC or AC, but it should always be used with the same type of current. In particular, a module which has already been used for AC should never be used for DC.

___________________________________________________________________________

10/29

_______________________________________________________________________________________

Characteristics of DC relay outputs (contd)

Interface modules

Loads

● voltage

● power resistive load (1) inductive load (L/R < 63 ms) (2)

TSX DST 16 32 TSX DST 16 34

24 VDC 48 to 130 VDC

0.2 W - P - 50 W 6 W - P - 50 W

0.2 W - P - 25 W 6 W - P - 25 W

Limit values

●

Voltage (including ripple) total load T<40°C in the module 40°C<T<55°C (derating)

Response time on resistive load

●

● from state 0 to state 1 from state 1 to state 0

Leakage current at state 0

Built-in protection against

●

● overloads and short-circuits overvoltages

Current draw

● internal 12 V 12 VL

12 VP

Code number

Status word

Compatibility with input modules

10 V - U - 30 V

16 relays

8 relays

15 ms max

20 ms max

0.2 mA max

38 V - U - 142 V

16 relays

8 relays

15 ms max

20 ms max

0.2 mA max none (3) included

(exc. power supply) none (3) none (4)

25 mA 25 mA

38mA/channel at 1 38 mA/channel at 1

52 52

0B11 0100

TSX DET 16 12

0B11 0100

TSX DET 8 14

_________

(1) Lifetime : 10 6 operations

(2) Cycle : - 1 operation per second on load, max lifetime = 5x10 5 operations

(3) Fit a - 4 A semi-delayed time fuse for each group of channels

(4) Fit an external discharge diode at the load terminals

___________________________________________________________________________

10/30

Rack-mounted discrete I/O interfaces 10

_______________________________________________________________________________________

10.4-6 Characteristics of 110/127 VAC solid state outputs : TSX DST 8 04/16 04

Interface modules

Loads

● voltage

● nominal current

● frequency

Limit values

● voltage

● frequency

● peak current when triggered

● minimum current

● total load on the module

T<40°C

40°C<T<55°C

TSX DST 8 04

110-127 VAC

2 A

50-60 Hz

93.5 to 140 VAC

47 to 63 Hz

15 A over 2 cycles once per second

10 mA

16 A derating of

0.4 A/°C

TSX DST 16 04

110-120 VAC

1 A

50-60 Hz

93.5 to 140 VAC

47 to 63 Hz

10 A over 2 cycles once per second

25 mA

8 A derating of

0.1 A/°C

Response time

● from state 0 to state 1

● from state 1 to state 0

Leakage current at state 0

Residual voltage at state 1

0.5 ms max

< 1/2 period

4 mA max to 140 V

I<35 mA : 11 V

I>35 mA : 1.4V

0.5 ms max

< 10 ms

3 mA max to 140 V

50 mA<I<In : 3 V

25 mA<I<50 mA : 13 V

Built-in protection against

● overloads and short-circuits

● overvoltages

Triacs turned on for zero voltage

Current draw on

● internal 12 V 12 VL

12 VP

3.15 A fuses none (1)

RC and GMOV peak limiters no no

Code number

Status word

Compatibility with input modules

24 mA

20 mA/channel at 1

DB01 0101

TSX DET 8 24

TSX DET 16 04

25 mA

17 mA/channel at 1

DB11 0111

TSX DET 8 24

TSX DET 16 04

_________

(1) Fit a 1.6 A semi-delayed time fuse for each channel.

___________________________________________________________________________

10/31

_______________________________________________________________________________________

10.4-7 Characteristics of 110/240 VAC solid state outputs : TSX DST 8 05

Interface module

Loads

● voltage

● nominal current

● frequency

Limit values

● voltage

● frequency

● peak current when triggered

● minimum current

● total load on the module

Response time

● from state 0 to state 1

● from state 1 to state 0

Leakage current at state 0

Residual voltage at state 1

TSX DST 8 05

110-240 VAC

2 A

50-60 Hz

93.5 to 264 VAC

47 to 63 Hz

15 A over 2 cycles once per second

20 mA

T<40°C

40°C<T<55°C

< 1/2 period

6 mA max to 264 V

I < 50 mA : 8 V

I > 300 mA : 2 V

16 A derating of 0.4 A/°C

Built-in protection against

● overloads and short-circuits

● overvoltages

Triacs turned on for zero voltage

Current draw on

● internal 12 V

Code number

Status word

Compatibility with input modules

12 VL

12 VP

3.15 A fuses

RC and GMOV peak limiters yes

24 mA

10 mA/channel at 1

DB01 0110

TSX DET 8 05

___________________________________________________________________________

10/32

Rack-mounted discrete I/O interfaces 10

_______________________________________________________________________________________

10.4-8 Characteristics of AC relay outputs : TSX DST 8 35/16 35/16 33

Interface modules

Loads

● voltage

● nominal current

TSX DST 8 35

24 to 240 VAC

U<127V : 2 A (1)

U<240V : 1 A (1)

TSX DST 16 35

24 to 240 VAC

U<127V : 1.1 A (2)

U<240V : 1 A (2)

Limit values

● peak current when triggered

● total load on the module

T<40°C

40°C<T<55°C

Response time

● from state 0 to state 1

● from state 1 to state 0

Leakage current at state 0

Built-in protection against

● overloads and short-circuits

● overvoltages

Current draw on

● internal 12 V 12 VL

12 VP

Code number

Status word

Compatibility with input modules

10 In over 2 cycles (AC15 duty)

8 relays

3 to 15 ms

3 to 18 ms

2.5 mA max to 260 V

3.15 A fuses

RC and GMOV peak limiters

24 mA

50 mA/channel at 1

DB01 1000

TSX DET 802

TSX DET 803

TSX DET 805

TSX DET 824

TSX DET 1603

TSX DET 1604

16 relays

8 relays

15 ms max

20 ms max none (3)

28 mA

38 mA/channel at 1

0B11 0100

TSX DET 802

TSX DET 803

TSX DET 805

TSX DET 824

TSX DET 1603

TSX DET 1604

_________

(1) Admissible current for 1 million operations.

For 1.5 million operations :

- 2 A

- 1 A

- 0.5 A if U < 48 V if U < 127 V if U < 240 V

(2) Admissible current for 0.35 million operations.

For 1 million operations :

- 0.35 A if U < 127 V

- 0.25 A if U < 240 V

(3) Fit a 1.6 A semi-delayed time fuse for each channel.

___________________________________________________________________________

10/33

_______________________________________________________________________________________

Characteristics of AC relay outputs (contd)

Interface modules

Loads

● voltage

● current resistive load

(AC12) inductive load

(L/R < 63 ms)

2 x 10 6 operations

0.4 x 10 6 operations

1 x 10 6 operations

0.3 x 10 6 operations

TSX DST 16 33

24 to 240 VAC

0.2 A

1 A

0.2 A

1 A

Limit values

●

Voltage (including ripple) total load T<40°C in the module 40°C<T<55°C (derating)

Response time on resistive load

●

● from state 0 to state 1 from state 1 to state 0

Leakage current at state 0

Built-in protection against

●

● overloads and short-circuits overvoltages

Current draw on

● internal 12 V 12 VL

12 VP

52 Code number

Status word

Compatibility with input modules

17 VAC - U - 264 VAC

16 relays

8 relays

15 ms max

20 ms max

0.1 mA max none (1) none (2)

25 mA

38mA/channel at 1

0B11 0100

TSX DET 8 05

_________

(1) Fit a - 4 A semi-delayed time fuse for each group of channels.

(2) Fit a protective device (RC or peak limiter).

___________________________________________________________________________

10/34

________________________________________________________

Catalogue of special purpose modules Section 11

___________________________________________________________________________

11.1

Analog interfaces and intelligent modules

Page

11/2

11/3

______________________________________________________________________________________

11.2

Counting and positioning interface modules 11/4

______________________________________________________________________________________

11.3

Axis control modules 11/4

______________________________________________________________________________________

11.4

Communication, network and operator dialogue modules 11/5

11/5

11/6

______________________________________________________________________________________

11.5

Installation of special purpose modules 11/7

___________________________________________________________________________

11/1

_______________________________________________________________________________________

11.1-1 Analog input modules

Type

High level

Input signal

0/10V

0/20 mA - 4/20 mA

Thermocouple (1)

PT100 temp. probe

(1 mA current)

0/20 mV - 0/50 mV

0/100 mV

0/160 mV (2)

0/250 mV (3)

0/400 mV (4)

No. of Documentation Reference channels

2 TSX D41 722 TSX ADT 201E

2 TSX D41 722 TSX ADT 202E

2 TSX D41 722 TSX ADT 203E

11.1-2 Analog input modules (intelligent modules)

Type

Isolated high level

Fast high level

Thermo-

couple (1)

PT100 temp. probe

(5)

High level

High density

Input signal

-10V/+10V, 0/10V

-5V/+5V, 0/5V

2/10V, 0/2V

0.4/2V

0/20 mA, 4/20 mA

-10V/+10V, 0/10V

0/20 mA, 4/20 mA

-50 mV/+50 mV

0/50 mV

-1/+1V, 0/1V

0,2/1V

75ý/250ý

1/5V

± 10V ± 5V

0/20 mA, 4/20 mA

No. of Documentation channels

TSX D41 727

TSX D23 001E

TSX D23 006E

TSX D41 727

Reference

TSX AEM 4 11E

TSX AEM 8 11E

TSX AEM 8 21E

TSX AEM 4 12E

TSX AEM 4 13E

TSX DM AEM 13E TSX AEM 16 13E

TSX DM AEM 16E TSX AEM 16 01E

TSX DM AEM 16E TSX AEM 16 02E

Thermocouple

(6)

- 100 mV/+100 mV

- 25 mV/+25 mV

12 TSX DM AEM 1212E TSX AEM 1212E

_________

(1) Type of thermocouple : BEJKRST

(2) Temperature : - 220°C to +160°C

(3) Temperature : - 220°C to +400°C

(4) Temperature : - 220°C to +850°C

(5) Temperature : - 200 to +800°C for AEM 4 13E

Temperature : - 50 to +400°C for AEM 16 13E

(6) Type of thermocouple : BEJKRSTLNU

___________________________________________________________________________

11/2

Catalogue of special purpose modules 11

_______________________________________________________________________________________

11.1-3 Analog output modules

Type

High level

8 bits

Output signal

0/10V

0/20 mA

4/20 mA

No. of channels

Documentation

TSX D23 007E

Reference

TSX AST 200E

____________________________________________________________________

11.1-4 Analog output modules

Type

High level

12 bits

Output signal

0/10V, 0/5V

±5V, ±10V

0/20 mA,4/20 mA

0/10V

No. of channels

Documentation

TSX D23 007E

Reference

TSX ASR 200E

TSX ASR 401E High level

11 bits + sign

High level

12 bits

High level

12 bits

High level

12 bits + sign

4/20 mA

(ext. power supply)

± 10 V

4/20 mA

0/20 mA

TSX D23 007E

TSX ASR 402E

TSX ASR 403E

TSX DM ASR 800E TSX ASR 800E

___________________________________________________________________________

11/3

_______________________________________________________________________________________

Type

Counting module with 2 independent channels (F max 2 KHz)

Multifunction rapid counting module for incremental encoder

Multifunction rapid counting module for absolute encoder

Fast I/O coprocessor module

Positioning module relay outputs solid state outputs

Documentation

TSX D41 735

TSX DM CCM 1E

TSX D23 010E

TSX D23 003E

TSX D41 713

Reference

TSX AXT 200E

TSX CCM 100E

TSX DTM 100E

TSX DMR 1652E

TSX AXM 171E

TSX AXM 171.1E

____________________________________________________________________

Type

Fast axis control module

Axis control module

Fast axis control module

2-axis control module

4-axis control module

Documentation

TXT DM PL7 AXS V4E

Reference

TSX AXM 182E

TSX AXM 172E

TSX AXM 182E

TXT DM PL7 MAX V5E

TSX AXM 292E

TSX AXM 492E

___________________________________________________________________________

11/4

Catalogue of special purpose modules 11

_______________________________________________________________________________________

11.4-1 Serial communication modules

Micro-software version

Channel 0 and 1 : Half duplex character string.

Type of adapter

Channel 0

RS232C

20 mA CL

RS422A/485

RS232 simp.

Channel 1

RS232C

20 mA CL

RS232C modem

RS422A/485

20 mA CL

RS422A/485

RS232 simp.

Documentation

TSX D41724 and

TSX D23 004E

Reference

TSX SCM 2011E

TSX SCM 2012E

TSX SCM 2013E

TSX SCM 2014E

TSX SCM 2022E

TSX SCM 2044E

TSX SCM 2055E

Micro-software version

Channel 0 : Half duplex character string.

Channel 1 : Configurable for :

Half duplex character string, Modbus® master, Modbus® slave, Pyromat.

Documentation Reference Type of adapter

Channel 0

RS232C

Channel 1

RS232C TSX D41724 TSX SCM 2211E

RS232C

20 mA CL

RS422A/485

20 mA CL

RS232C modem

RS232C/485

20 mA CL

RS422A/485 and

TSX D23 004E and

TSX D23 002E

TSX SCM 2212E

TSX SCM 2213E

TSX SCM 2214E

TSX SCM 2222E

TSX SCM 2244E

Micro-software version

Channel 0 : Half duplex character string.

Channel 1 : Configurable for :

Half duplex character string, Full duplex character string, UNI-TE master,

UNI-TE slave.

Type of adapter

Channel 0 Channel 1

Documentation Reference

RS232C

20 mA CL

RS232C

20 mA CL

RS232C modem

RS232C/485

20 mA CL

TSX D41 724 and

TSX D23 004E

TSX SCM 2111E

TSX SCM 2112E

TSX SCM 2113E

TSX SCM 2114E

TSX SCM 2122E

___________________________________________________________________________

11/5

_______________________________________________________________________________________

11.4-2 UNI-TELWAY communication modules

Micro-software version

Channel 0 : Half duplex character string.

Channel 1 : UNI-TE master, UNI-TE slave.

Type of adapter

Channel 0

RS232C

20 mA CL

RS422A/485

Channel 1

UNI-TELWAY

Documentation

TSX D24 004 E and

TSX D24 005E

Reference

TSX SCM 2116E

TSX SCM 2126E

TSX SCM 2146E

____________________________________________________________________

11.4-3 Network modules

Designation

TELWAY network module

MAPWAY network module

ETHWAY network module

Documentation

TSX D41 704

TSX DR MAP V4E

TSX DM MAP 107V4E

TSX DM ETH 107E

Reference

TSX MPT 104E

TSX MAP 1074E

TSX ETH 107E

____________________________________________________________________

11.4-4 Operator dialogue modules

Designation

Monochrome operator dialogue module

Colour operator dialogue module

Documentation

TSX DM PCM E

Reference

TSX PCM 27E

TSX PCM 37E

___________________________________________________________________________

11/6

Catalogue of special purpose modules 11

_______________________________________________________________________________________

Interface modules

Interface modules can be installed in any of the following racks :

- The basic PLC rack

- Direct I/O extension racks

- Local or remote I/O extension racks.

Intelligent modules

Intelligent modules can be installed in the following racks :

- The basic PLC rack

- Local or remote I/O extension racks equipped with a complete bus.

Installation options for all the special purpose modules are summarized in the table below.

Modules Basic PLC racks

Direct I/O extension racks

Local or remote extension racks

Complete bus Simplified bus

TSX ADT...

TSX AEM ...

TSX AST 200

TSX ASR 200

TSX ASR 4..

or TSX ASR 800

TSX AXT 200

TSX CCM 100

TSX DTM 100

TSX DMR 1652

TSX AXM 171

TSX AXM ...

TSX SCM ....

TSX MPT 104

TSX MAP .../ETH...

TSX PCM ...

11/7

_______________________________________________________________________________________

___________________________________________________________________________

11/8

________________________________________________________

Addressing Section 12

___________________________________________________________________________

12.1

Rack addressing

Page

12/2

12/3

______________________________________________________________________________________

12.2

Rack-mounted discrete I/O addressing 12/5

12/5

12/7

____________________________________________________________________________________

12.3

Addressing TBX remote I/O on a FIPIO bus 12/8

12/8

12/9

___________________________________________________________________________

12/1

_______________________________________________________________________________________

12.1-1 Presentation

The various racks can have double or single addressing, depending on their type.

The basic PLC rack (address 0/1) and its associated direct extension rack (address 2/3) always have the same address.

For the other extension racks, the address is defined by setting jumpers or switches in :

● the TSX LES 61 or 62 cable connector in the case of a local extension rack

● the TSX LFS 200/201 fiber optic or TSX LES 200 electrical rackmaster module in the case of a remote extension.

The double addressing racks enable simultaneous use of 24 and 32-channel interface modules in the basic PLC rack and its associated direct I/O extension rack.

24 and 32-channel interface modules can also be installed in the single addressing

rack, but the corresponding slot in the direct extension rack must be left empty.

Type of racks

Basic PLC rack

Local or remote extension rack

Type of addressing

Double addressing

Single addressing

Direct I/O extension rack

Double addressing if the rack is used with the basic PLC rack

Single addressing if the rack is used with a local or remote extension rack

Addresses

Racks

Basic PLC rack

Local or remote I/O extension racks

Associated direct I/O extension racks

0/1

2/3

Addresses

If a direct extension rack associated with a basic PLC rack or a local or remote extension rack is not used, its address is lost.

___________________________________________________________________________

12/2

Addressing 12

_______________________________________________________________________________________

12.1-2 Addressing example

Bac de la base automate double addressing

0/1

Bac d'extension locale ou distance single addressing

T x

Bac d'extension directe d'E/S double addressing

2/3

Bac d'extension directe d'E/S single addressing x+1 x = 4, 6, 8, A, C, E x + 1 = 5, 7, 9, B, D, F

____________________________________________________________________

12.1-3 Extension rack address coding

Local I/O extension racks

The address of a local I/O extension rack (x) and the address of its associated direct extension rack (x+1) defined by setting the addressing jumpers in the TSX LES 61 or

TSX LES 62 cable connector installed on the TSX LES 20 local rackmaster module.

RACKS

2/3 4/5 6/7 8/9

EXEMPLE

RACKS 6/7

Strap position :

OUT IN

RACKS

A/B C/D E/F

___________________________________________________________________________

12/3

_______________________________________________________________________________________

Remote I/O extension racks

The address of a remote I/O extension rack (x) and the address of its associated direct extension rack (x+1) are defined by setting the addressing switches in the TSX LFS 200 or 201 module for remote fiber optic extensions or TSX LES 200 module for electrical remote extensions.

Switch settings

Addressing label

Addressing switches

LFS 200

RUN

Set the addressing switches as shown on the addressing label.

I/O

Example :

For a TSX LFS 200 module installed in extension rack 6.

Switch settings.

1 2 3 4 5 6

Addressing label

CURSOR SWITCH POSITION

1 2 3 4 5 6

RACKS 2/3

RACKS 4/5

RACKS 6/7

RACKS 8/9

RACKS A/B

RACKS C/D

RACKS E/F

Note :

There are 6 addressing switches (W1 to W6). Switches W1 to W3 are not used for setting the address and must always be set as shown on the label. The addresses can only be set by altering the settings on switches W4 to W6. In the majority of cases they are set as follows : W4=2, W5=4,

W6=8.

___________________________________________________________________________

12/4

Addressing 12

_______________________________________________________________________________________

Discrete I/O addressing can be :

●

Geographic, in which case the addresses depend on the position of the I/O modules in the racks which make up the configuration.

●

Mnemonic, in which each I/O is addressed by a mnemonic of 8 alphanumeric characters maximum. In this case the user must define the mnemonics in a table showing the correspondence between each mnemonic and the corresponding I/O.

____________________________________________________________________

12.2-1 Geographic addressing

The discrete I/O interface modules can have 4, 8, 16, 24 or 32 channels. The address of an input or output is defined by :

●

4, 8 and 16-channel modules I : Input

I or Oxy, i O : Output

x : Number of the rack in the configuration

●

24 and 32-channel modules y : Number of the slot

I or Oxy, i (channel 0 to 15) in the rack

I or O(x+1)y, i (channel 16 to 23 or 31) , : Comma

i : Channel number

Addressing the discrete I/O interface modules in the basic configuration (PLC base + direct I/O extension).

Reminder : The basic PLC rack always has the address 0/1.

Its associated direct extension rack always has the address 2/3.

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

2 x=0/1

Modules

4 8 16 24 32 channels channels channels channels channels

I/O addresses

0y,0 to

0y,3

0y,0 to

0y,7

0y,0 to

0y,F

0y,0 to

0y,F

1y,0 to

1y,7

0y,0 to

0y,F

1y,0 to

1y,F x=2/3

I/O addresses

2y,0 to

2y,3

2y,0 to

2y,7

2y,0 to

2y,F

2y,0 to

2y,F

3y,0 to

3y,7

2y,0 to

2y,F

3y,0 to

3y,F

___________________________________________________________________________

12/5

_______________________________________________________________________________________

Addressing the discrete I/O modules in the local or remote extensions

Reminder : The address of a local extension rack is defined by setting the addressing jumpers in the TSX LES 61 or 62 cable connector (see section 12.1-3 in this section). The address of a remote extension rack is defined by setting the addressing switches in the TSX LFS 200/201 or TSX LES 200 rackmaster module (see section 12.1-3 in this section).

The direct extension rack associated with a local or remote extension rack always has the address of the latter plus 1.

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

2 x

Modules

4 8 16 24 32 channels channels channels channels channels

I/O addresses xy,0 to xy,3 xy,0 to xy,7 xy,0 to xy,F xy,0 to xy,F xy,0 to xy,F

(x+1)y,0 to

(x+1)y,7

(x+1)y,0 to

(x+1)y,F x+1

I/O

(x+1)y,0 addresses to

(x+1)y,3

(x+1)y,0 to

(x+1)y,7

(x+1)y,0 to

(x+1)y,F

PLCs

TSX or PMX 47-40

TSX or PMX 67-40/87-40/107-40 x

Extension rack addresses

x + 1

For the method of addressing analog and intelligent modules, refer to the manual of the module concerned.

___________________________________________________________________________

12/6

Addressing 12

_______________________________________________________________________________________

Example :

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

I0,F I0,F :

Channel 15 of the input module located in slot 0 of the basic PLC rack.

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

O26,0

O26,0 :

Channel 0 of the output module located in slot 6 of the direct extension rack.

Note :

The TSX DET 4 66 and TSX DST 4 17 interface modules have one fault bit per channel. The correspondence between the addresses of the channels and the addresses of the fault bits is as follows :

Address of the channel

I or O xy,0

I or O xy,1

I or O xy,2

I or O xy,3

Address of the fault bit

I or O xy,4

I or O xy,5

I or O xy,6

I or O xy,7

____________________________________________________________________

12.2-2 Mnemonic addressing

A mnemonic is composed of a string of 8 alphanumeric characters maximum in which the first character must be a capital letter and the other letters in lower case.

The mnemonics must be defined beforehand in a mnemonic table.

For an input or an output, the mnemonic to be defined corresponds to a module object; the bits of the module do not have to be defined in the mnemonics table.

Example

Geographic address of the module

I12 input module located in rack 1 and in slot 2

Mnemonic address of the module

Safety

Mnemonic address of a bit

Safety,1 bit 1 of module I12

___________________________________________________________________________

12/7

_______________________________________________________________________________________

12.3-1 Addressing a TBX device on the FIPIO bus

Principle

For a device connected on the FIPIO bus to operate :

• the PLC station containing the FIPIO port must be configured. This operation, performed under XTEL-CONF consists of defining the product family of the device

(TBX, ATV, FTX, etc) and the type of device connected (communication module, basic and extyension bases, etc) for each of the connection points on the FIPIOI bus. The connection points for addresses 0 and 63 respectively reserved for the PLC and for the console are not configured.

• that its address(1 to 62) is defined in the device itself, by positionsing the dip switches for the TBX modules (see diagrams below).

Setting the addresses on the modules

This is set by addressing switches located on top of the connector linking the TBX device to the bus. These 8 dipswitches enable the address to be coded in binary with in the limits indicated below :

Type of processor

TSX P47 415

TSX or TPMX P47455

TSX or TPMX P67 455

TSX or TPMX P87 455/P107 455

Max no. of addresses

32 (0 to 63)

64 (0 to 63)

Max no. of TBX addresses

31 (1 to 62)

62 (1 to 62)

Addressing a monobloc TBX device (maximum of 31 devices per architecture)

Example : setting address 15 on the device

16 8 4 2 1

Note : the 3 most significat switches (to the left) are inactive, their position is irrelevant.

Addressing a modular TBX device (maximum of 62 devices per architecture)

Example : setting address 62 on the device

128 64 32 16 8 4 2 1

12/8

Addressing 12

_______________________________________________________________________________________

12.3-2 PL7-3 addresses of TBX remote I/O

The syntax for objects linked to the remote I/O is as follows :

Address of a channel (input or output)

R I 2 , 0 , 6

Channel number : 0 to 15

Module number : 0 for the base and 1 for the extension

Connection point address on the FIPIO bus : 1 to 62

I for an input and O for an output

Designates TBX remote I/O

For example RI25,1,9

0 1

0 15 0

▲

RD25,1,9 designates the fault bit for the channel. It is set at state 1 to signal that the channel is faulty.

STS25,1,9 designates the status word associated with the channel. This word, common to 8 channels, indicates the nature of the fault.

TRIP25,1,9 at state 1 indicates that the solid state output has tripped.

RST25,1,9 activates resetting of the tripped output. This bit is common to 8 channels and does not affect channels which have not tripped.

For further details, refer to the installation manual for TBX remote I/O : TSX DM TBXT

V5E.

___________________________________________________________________________

12/9

_______________________________________________________________________________________

___________________________________________________________________________

12/10

________________________________________________________

Module locating devices and Section 13

13.1

Module locating devices

Page

13/2

13/3

______________________________________________________________________________________

13.2

Module code numbers 13/4

___________________________________________________________________________

13/1

_______________________________________________________________________________________

13.1-1 Hardware locating devices

All Telemecanique racks and modules are equipped with patented locating devices which :

●

● prevent errors when installing or changing modules ensure the electrical safety of the PLC configuration ensure the operational safety of the PLC application.

Module locating devices

Each module has a two or three figure code which is set at the factory on the female locating devices

1 on the back of the module.

B 1

The list of module code numbers is given in section

13.2.

Backplane locating devices

The backplane of each rank is equipped with male locating devices.

2 locating devices per module slot for racks equipped with a simplified bus.

3 locating devices per module slot for racks equipped with a complete bus.

___________________________________________________________________________

13/2

Module locating devices and code numbers 13

_______________________________________________________________________________________

The male locating devices on the backplane are set at the factory in a neutral position, which prevents modules from being plugged in. To plug in a module, the user must therefore turn the male locating devices so that they correspond to the code number

(Telemecanique code) of the module being installed.

Locating pin

TE CODE

ADDRESS B (4)

ADDRESS A (5)

____________________________________________________________________

13.1-2 Software locating devices

During programming, the user declares the software code for the I/O modules which he expects to use. If the actual configuration is not the same as that declared, the user is informed (I/O fault).

___________________________________________________________________________

13/3

_______________________________________________________________________________________

Designation Reference

Power supply modules TSX SUP 40

TSX SUP 41

TSX SUP 42

Code A B C

9 0

9 1

9 2

Reference

TSX SUP 61

TSX SUP 62

TSX SUP 702

Code ABC

9 3 1

9 3 2

9 3 4

Designation

TSX P

●●●

processors version V5

TPMX P

●●●

processors version V5

Reference

TSX P47 405

TSX P47 415

TSX P47 425

TSX P47 455

TSX P67 425

TPMX P47 425

TPMX P47 455

TPMX P67 425

TPMX P67 455

Code A B C

9 4 4

9 4 5

9 4 6

9 4 7

9 4 8

9 5 5

9 5 6

9 5 7

9 5 8

Reference

TSX P67 455

TSX P87 425

TSX P87 455

TSX P107 425

TSX P107 455

TPMX P87 425

TPMX P87 455

TPMX P107 425

TPMX P107 455

Code ABC

9 4 9

9 5 1

9 5 2

9 5 3

9 5 4

9 5 9

9 6 0

9 6 1

9 6 2

Designation

TSX P

●●●

processors version V4

TPMX P

●●●

processors version V4

Reference

TSX P47 400

TSX P47 410

TSX P47 411

TSX P47 420

TSX P67 410

TPMX P47 420

TPMX P67 420

Code A B C

9 8 0

9 8 1

9 6 9

9 8 2

9 8 6

9 6 3

9 6 4

Reference

TSX P67 420

TSX P87 410

TSX P87 420

TSX P107 410

TSX P107 420

TPMX P87 420

TPMX P107 420

Code ABC

9 8 7

9 9 3

9 9 4

9 9 5

9 9 6

9 6 5

9 6 6

Designation Reference

Modules for local TSX LES 20 and remote extensions TSX LFS 120/121

TSX LFS 200/201

Code A B C

8 9 0

8 9 1

8 9 2

Reference

TSX LES 120

TSX LES 200

Code ABC

8 9 3

8 9 4

___________________________________________________________________________

13/4

Module locating devices and code numbers 13

_______________________________________________________________________________________

Designation

Discrete input interface modules

Reference

TSX DET 8 12

TSX DET 16 12

TSX DET 32 32

TSX DET 32 42

TSX DET 32 52

TSX DET 8 13

TSX DET 16 13

TSX DET 8 02

Code A B C

3 2

5 6

3 3

5 8

3 4

Reference

TSX DET 8 03

TSX DET 16 04

TSX DET 8 05

TSX DET 8 14

TSX DET 8 24

TSX DET 4 66

TSX DET 16 03

Code ABC

3 5

5 9

3 7

3 8

3 6

3 9

5 9

Designation

Discrete output interface modules

Reference

TSX DST 16 12

TSX DST 8 17

TSX DST 4 17

TSX DST 16 04

TSX DST 8 04

TSX DST 8 05

TSX DST 8 35

Code A B C

5 3

2 9

0 4

5 5

2 1

2 2

2 4

Reference

TSX DST 16 32

TSX DST 16 33

TSX DST 16 34

TSX DST 16 35

TSX DST 16 82

TSX DST 8 82

TSX DST 24 72

TSX DST 24 82

TSX DST 32 92

Code ABC

5 2

5 3

2 3

5 3

Designation

Analog modules and intelligent modules

Reference

TSX AEM 4 11

TSX AEM 4 12

TSX AEM 4 13

TSX AEM 8 11

TSX AEM 8 21

TSX AEM 16 01

TSX AEM 16 02

TSX AEM 16 13

TSX AEM 12 12

Code A B C

6 3 2

6 3 3

6 3 4

6 4 8

6 4 9

6 5 0

6 5 1

6 5 2

6 5 3

Reference

TSX ADT 2 01

TSX ADT 2 02

TSX ADT 2 03

TSX AST 2 00

TSX ASR 2 00

TSX ASR 4 01

TSX ASR 4 02

TSX ASR 4 03

TSX ASR 8 00

Code ABC

4 5

4 6

4 7

5 4

0 9 0

6 6 5

6 6 6

6 6 7

6 6 8

Designation

Counting and positioning interface modules

Reference

TSX AXT 2 00

TSX CCM 1 00

TSX CTM 1 00

TSX DTM 1 00

Code A B C

5 7

7 3 0

7 3 3

Reference Code ABC

TSX DMR 16 52

TSX AXM 1 71

TSX AXM 1 71 1

7 7 6

7 2 8

7 3 1

Designation

Axis control modules

Reference

TSX AXM 1 62

TSX AXM 1 72

TSX AXM 1 82

Code A B C

7 3 5

7 2 9

7 3 2

Reference

TSX AXM 2 92

TSX AXM 4 92

Code ABC

7 3 6

7 3 7

___________________________________________________________________________

13/5

_______________________________________________________________________________________

Designation

Serial communication modules

Reference

TSX SCM 20 11

TSX SCM 20 12

TSX SCM 20 13

TSX SCM 20 14

TSX SCM 20 22

TSX SCM 20 44

TSX SCM 20 55

TSX SCM 21 11

TSX SCM 21 12

TSX SCM 21 13

TSX SCM 21 14

TSX SCM 21 16

Code A B C

6 9 6

6 9 7

Reference

TSX SCM 21 22

TSX SCM 21 26

TSX SCM 21 46

TSX SCM 22 11

TSX SCM 22 12

TSX SCM 22 13

TSX SCM 22 14

TSX SCM 22 22

TSX SCM 22 44

Code ABC

6 9 7

6 9 8

Designation

Network modules

Reference

TSX MPT 104

TSX MAP 1074

Code A B C

1 2

1 3

Reference

TSX ETH 107

Code ABC

7 1 6

Designation

Operator dialogue modules

Reference

TSX PCM 27

TSX PCM 37

Code A B C

7 1 2

7 1 3

Reference Code ABC

___________________________________________________________________________

13/6

________________________________________________________

Installation Divider B

___________________________________________________________________________

Composition of a configuration

Pages

1/1

1.1 Installation rules

1.2 Installation examples

1.3 Choice of enclosures

______________________________________________________________________________________

Dimensions and mounting 2/1

2/1

2.1 Dimensions

2.2 Mounting

______________________________________________________________________________________

Preparing the racks and the configuration 3/1

3/1

3.1 Preparing the racks

3.2 Installing the racks

3.3 Preparing the configuration

______________________________________________________________________________________

Connecting the components 4/1

4/1

4.1 Grounding

4.2 Power supplies

4.3 Discrete I/O modules

4.4 Local I/O extensions

4.5 Remote fiber optic I/O extensions

4.6 Remote electrical I/O extensions

4.7 Integrated UNI-TELWAY port

4.8 Integrated FIPWAY port

4.9 Modules equipped with TSX BLK 4 terminal blocks

4.10 Cable routing

___________________________________________________________________________

B/1

________________________________________________________

Installation Divider B

___________________________________________________________________________

B/2

________________________________________________________

Composition of a configuration Section 1

___________________________________________________________________________

1.1

Installation rules

Page

1/2

1/3

1/6

___________________________________________________________________________________

1.2

Installation examples 1/7

1/7

1/8

___________________________________________________________________________________

1.3

Choice of enclosures 1/10

___________________________________________________________________________

1/1

_______________________________________________________________________________________

1.1 Installation rules

1.1-1 Layout of the racks

When composing a PLC configuration, certain rules must be observed concerning the layout and connection of the racks and the installation of the modules.

Use of wiring guides

Use TSX RAC 10 wiring guides (sold separately) to lead the field wiring into the terminal blocks and ensure the circulation of air through the terminal blocks and modules.

When installing several racks in the same enclosure, the following rules must be observed :

Direct I/O extension

• Leave a space of at least 150 mm between the racks for the cable ducting and to ensure the circulation of air.

• The basic PLC rack should be installed in the bottom of the enclosure, so as to benefit from the lowest ambient temperature in the enclosure.

• Heat generating components such as transformers, power supplies, etc, should not be located under the basic PLC rack in the same enclosure.

• Sufficient space should be left on both sides of the racks to allow for the cable runs and for the circulation of air to ensure heat exchange with the outside.

d 150 mm

Basic PLC

___________________________________________________________________________

1/2

Composition of a configuration 1

_______________________________________________________________________________________

1.1-2 Connections between racks

Several types of connecting links are used to interconnect the racks in a configuration.

Electrical link between :

Direct I/O extension

This link uses the TSX CBA 008 connecting cable 3 which is 1.2 meters (4 ft) long.

The distance d between two racks must not exceed 800 mm (2.5 ft).

3 d 800 mm

Electrical links between :

Local I/O extension

These links use TSX CBC... connecting cables, which are connected via cable connectors to :

● the processor which is located in the basic PLC rack.

●

TSX LES 20 local extension management modules in the local I/O extension racks

(see Divider A, Section 7).

Direct I/O extension

3 d 800 mm

The distance D between the TSX LES 64 or 65 cable connector

located on the processor module and the TSX LES 61 cable connector

located on the TSX

LES 20 module in the last local I/O extension rack must not exceed 30 meters.

Basic PLC

___________________________________________________________________________

1/3

_______________________________________________________________________________________

Electrical links between :

These links use TSX CB... cables 2 which are connected via TSX LES 805 or TSX

LES 810 tap junctions 1 to :

●

The TSX LES 120 module located in the basic PLC rack.

●

The TSX LES 200 modules located in the remote I/O extension racks.

(See Divider A Section 8.4).

Electrical remote

I/O extension

Electrical remote

I/O extension

The distance D between the basic PLC rack and the last remote I/O extension rack must not exceed 500 meters (98 ft) (1).

Basic PLC

_________

(1) 500 meters (98 ft) with TSX LES 805 tap junctions

400 meters (78.5 ft) with TSX LES 810 tap junctions

___________________________________________________________________________

1/4

Composition of a configuration 1

_______________________________________________________________________________________

Fiber optic links between :

These links use :

●

Either TSX CBD ... pre-equipped fiber optic cables 1 when using TSX LFS

120/200 modules which are connected to :

- the TSX LFS 120 fiber optic adaptor module located in the basic PLC rack.

- the TSX LFS 200 fiber optic rackmaster module located in the remote I/O extension rack.

For distances of more than 30 meters, a user supplied fiber optic cable 2 is necessary. (See Divider A Section 8.3).

●

Or user supplied fiber optic cables when using TSX LFS 121/201 modules with fiber optic diameter 62.5/125 or 50/125.

(See Divider A Section 8.3).

Remote fiber optic

I/O extension

Remote fiber optic

I/O extension

Basic PLC

Fiber optic diameter

100/140

62,5/125

50/125

Modules used

Distance (in meters) between

Base / first extension (a)

Extension / Base / last extension (b) extension (c)

TSX LFS 120 1000 m max

TSX LFS 200

1000 m max 2000 m max

2000 m max TSX LFS 121 570 m min

TSX LFS 201 2000 m max

TSX LFS 121 1800 m max

TSX LFS 201

570 m min

2000 m max

1800 m max 2000 m max

TSX LFS 121 490 m max

TSX LFS 201

490 m max 1960 m max

_________

(1) If the remote extension racks are fitted with intelligent modules, the maximum distance between the PLC base and the last extension rack is limited according to the type of processor :

- TSX P47 4../P67 4.. processor : 750 meters

- TSX P87 4../P107.4.. processor : 1000 meters

___________________________________________________________________________

1/5

_______________________________________________________________________________________

1.1-3 Installation of the modules

The configuration example below illustrates the rules that should be observed when installing modules in the racks.

Discrete I/O modules

1 , counting and analog 2

Simplified bus

Local I/O extension

TSX DET. input modules, TSX DST. output modules, TSX AXT. counting modules and

TSX ADT./AST. analog modules can be installed in any available slot of any rack which has the simplified or complete bus.

They should however be grouped together for ease of wiring and cable routing.

Simplified bus

Direct I/O extension

Intelligent modules

(excluding network modules)

TSX AEM./ASR., TSX CTM./DMR./DTM.,

TSX AXM. and TSX SCM. intelligent modules can be installed in any available slot of any rack that is equipped with the complete bus.

An intelligent module cannot operate in a rack equipped with the simplified bus.

Complete bus

Local I/O extension

Network modules

TSX MPT 104, TSX MAP 1074 and TSX

ETH 107 modules can be installed in any available slot in the basic PLC rack.

A network module cannot operate in any rack other than the basic PLC rack.

3 1

Simplified bus

Direct I/O extension

Complete bus

Basic PLC

Note :

Analog modules should be installed as far away as possible from the power supply in order to avoid radiated electrical interference. They should also be kept away from areas where there are wide temperature variations.

4 3 1 2

___________________________________________________________________________

1/6

Composition of a configuration 1

_______________________________________________________________________________________

1.2 Installation examples

1.2-1 Example 1 : TSX 47-40 configuration

Built on a 700 x 1850 chassis for an AA1 - EB 2086 modular enclosure, this configuration comprises the following components :

Basic PLC rack.

Direct I/O extension rack.

Local I/O extension rack.

TSX LES 64 cable connector.

TSX CBC ... local extension connecting cable.

6 TSX LES 61 cable connector for end of local extension.

820

760

700

AK2 GA.. slotted cable ducts are used for wiring.

7 AK2 GA69 (capacity : 280 wires of

1 mm 2 ).

AK2 GA65 (capacity : 170 wires of

1 mm 2 ).

9 AB1-SF... terminal blocks with removable carriers, for external connections.

___________________________________________________________________________

1/7

_______________________________________________________________________________________

1.2-2 Example 2 : TSX 67-40 configuration

7 3 2 6 4 2

2340

2280

2220

8 1 5 2 10 11 12 9 8 7 4 2

___________________________________________________________________________

1/8

Composition of a configuration 1

_______________________________________________________________________________________

Example 2 (continued)

Built on three 700 x 1850 chassis for AA1 - EB 2086 modular enclosures, this configuration comprises the following components :

1 Basic 67-40 PLC rack.

2 Direct I/O extensions racks.

3 Local I/O extension racks with complete bus.

4 Local I/O extension racks with simplified bus.

5 TSX LES 64 cable connector for basic PLC.

6 TSX LES 61 cable connector for last rack.

7 TSX LES 62 intermediate cable connectors.

8 TSX CBC ... local extension connecting cables.

9 TSX CBC ... local extension connecting cables.

AK2 GA.. slotted cable ducts are used for wiring.

& AK2 GA69 (capacity : 280 wires of 1 mm 2 ).

é AK2 GA65 (capacity : 170 wires of 1 mm 2 ).

" AB1-SF... terminal blocks with removable carriers, for external connections.

Note 1

To avoid the risk of damage during transport and handling, it is recommended that configurations comprising more than 3 chassis should be built on site. The weight of each chassis fitted with its components should not exceed 250 Kg.

Note 2

The doors of type AA1 ... modular enclosures can be fitted with transparent panels

(refer to Telemecanique specialized catalogue).

___________________________________________________________________________

1/9

_______________________________________________________________________________________

1.3 Choice of enclosures

In industrial environments model 40 PLCs are protected (against dust, damp and shocks) by enclosures.

Telemecanique supplies a range of modular metal enclosures (see specialized catalogue).

Standards and degree of protection

Telemecanique's AA1-EB2086 modular metal enclosures conform to the following standards and degrees of protection :

Standards Degree of protection

IEC 144 and 259

DIN 40050

NF C20-010 class IP 54 class IP 54 class IP 547

Note

To conform to the UL 508 standard, model 40 PLCs must be mounted in UL type 12 enclosures.

Temperature inside the enclosure

Depending on the ambient conditions (temperature and dust), special care should be taken regarding the type of convection used to evacuate heat dissipated in the enclosure by the various components during operation, in order to ensure that the adjacent temperature never exceeds 55° C.

Natural convection

The rise in temperature in an enclosure causes air to circulate. The heat is evacuated to the outside by contact with the outside panels of the enclosure. The circulation of the air is improved by the fans fitted to certain racks.

Enhanced natural convection

Fitting air vents

to the enclosure improves the circulation of the air around the components. The degree of protection of the enclosure then becomes IP 23 (not protected against dust).

In a dusty environment it is therefore necessary to fit the air vents with filters and ensure that they are kept clean.

1 1

___________________________________________________________________________

1/10

________________________________________________________

Dimensions and mounting Section 2

___________________________________________________________________________

2.1

Dimensions

Page

_______________________________________________________________________________________

2.2

Mounting 2/6

2/6

___________________________________________________________________________

2/1

_______________________________________________________________________________________

2.1 Dimensions

2.1-1 Standard rear-mounted racks

4 x ø7

TSX RKN 82

TSX RKN 8

TSX RKS 8

8 x ø7

235

P1 (1)

2 460,5

465

482,5

TSX RKE 8

4 x ø7

8 x ø7

235

P1 (1)

2 460,5

465

482,5

4 x ø7

TSX RKN 8F

TSX RKN 82F

TSX RKN 82FD

8 x ø7

235

P1 (1)

2 460,5

465

482,5

_________

(1) See next page

___________________________________________________________________________

2/2

Dimensions and mounting 2

_______________________________________________________________________________________

2.1-2 Short rear-mounted racks

TSX RKN 52

TSX RKN 5

235

P1 (1)

2 342

346,5

364

TSX RKE 7

235

P1 (1)

Type of module

Discrete I/O (with BLK terminal blocks)

Modules with TSX BLK4 terminal blocks

TSX MPT 104/MAP 107 4/ETH 107 modules

LES 20 modules

Modules with TSX CAC 04 connector

(TSX AXT/AXM 172/DTM 100)

TSX LFS 200/201/LFS 120/121 modules

TSX LES 120/200 modules

TSX SCM modules with TSX CAC 01 connector

TSX AXM 162/182/292/492 module

275

295

310

342

346,5

364

Depths P1 and P2

235

267

262

___________________________________________________________________________

2/3

_______________________________________________________________________________________

2.1-3 19" front-mounted racks

44,45

88,9

44,45

TSX RKN 82 W11

TSX RKN 8 W11

TSX RKS 8 W11

8 x ø7

P2 (1)

230

240

446

465,1

483

44,45

88,9

44,45

TSX RKE 8 W11 8 x ø7

P2 (1)

230

240

446

465,1

483

44,45

88,9

44,45

TSX RKN 82F W11

TSX RKN 82FD W11 8 x ø7

P2 (1)

230

240

446

465,1

483

_________

(1) See previous page

___________________________________________________________________________

2/4

Dimensions and mounting 2

_______________________________________________________________________________________

2.1-4 TSX LES 805/810 tap junctions

(1)

(1) 2 knock-outs

∅

5,6, depth 20

= 50

___________________________________________________________________________

2/5

_______________________________________________________________________________________

2.2 Mounting

2.2-1 Mounting rear-mounted racks on 35 mm rails

(with M6 x 12 mounting screws)

AF1-CF56 AM1-ED

342 (2)

460,5 (1)

________

(1) TSX RKE 8, TSX RKN 82, TSX RKN 8, TSX RKN 8F, TSX RKS 8, TSX RKN 82F/82FD

(2) TSX RKN 52, TSX RKN 5, TSX RKE 7

____________________________________________________________________

2.2-2 Mounting 19" front-mounted racks

(with M6 x 18 screws and clip nuts)

450 min.

465,1

_________________________________________________________________________________________

2.2-3 TSX LES 805/810 tap junctions

The tap junction is installed inside the unit or enclosure, and can be mounted on :

●

Telequick AM1 PA.... pre-slotted mounting plates,

●

AM1-DP... Omega rails with two LA9-D09976 clip-on plates attached to the rear of the tap junction. These plates are fixed using M3x8 screws in the holes provided in the tap junction. The LA9-D09976 plates are not supplied with the junction.

___________________________________________________________________________

2/6

________________________________________________________

Preparing the racks and the Section 3

3.1

Preparing the racks

Page

3/2

___________________________________________________________________________________

3.2

Installing the racks 3/4

3/4

3/5

___________________________________________________________________________________

3.3

Preparing the configuration 3/6

___________________________________________________________________________

3/1

_______________________________________________________________________________________

3.1 Preparing the racks

Numbering the racks and setting the locating devices

1 2

1 Number the rack

2 Set the backplane locating devices

Installing the wiring guides

Installing the wiring guides Wiring guides installed

Installing the TSX RAC

●●

grounding strip (on rear-mounted racks)

Assembly Mounting

___________________________________________________________________________

3/2

Preparing the racks and the configuration 3

_______________________________________________________________________________________

Installing the discrete I/O terminal blocks

Attaching the terminal block straps Hooking on the terminal blocks

Installing the slot covers

Standard or 19" racks Short racks

Cover the slots that cannot be used in the I/O direct extension racks. These racks are delivered with the slot covers installed

Install covers on all unused slots

___________________________________________________________________________

3/3

_______________________________________________________________________________________

3.2 Installing the racks

3.2-1 Mounting the racks

Rear-mounted racks (mounted on rails)

1 AM1-EC1.5 notched uprights

2 AM1-ED 200 rails mounted on uprights using AF1-CD6 notched nuts and AF1-

VA618 (M6x18) screws

3 AF1-CF6 sliding nuts

4 AF1-VA612 (M6x12) mounting screws

Front-mounted racks (mounted in 19" racks)

1 M6x18 screws with clip nuts

Note

Ensure that there is sufficient space between the racks (see Divider B, Section 2).

___________________________________________________________________________

3/4

Preparing the racks and the configuration 3

_______________________________________________________________________________________

3.2-2 Cable ducts

Mounting on rails

The vertical and horizontal cable ducts should be composed of AK2 slotted cable ducts that can be clipped to the uprights and rails of the chassis.

Mounting the cable ducts

Mounting the duct supports

AM1-ED200 rails mounted on the notched uprights using AF1-CH6 sliding nuts and

AF1-VA 618 (M6x18) screws.

AK2-XD60 clip-on duct support for horizontal and vertical cable ducts.

3 AK2-GA69 slotted cable duct (capacity 280 wires of 1 mm 2 ).

AK2-GA65 slotted cable duct (capacity 170 wires of 1 mm 2 ).

5 AK2-CA6 clip-on cover for cable ducting.

___________________________________________________________________________

3/5

_______________________________________________________________________________________

3.3 Preparing the configuration

This consists of installing all the modules in the racks according to the configuration designer's instructions, and includes :

Removing the blanking covers from the backplane connectors of the racks.

Setting the backplane locating devices correctly to receive the corresponding modules.

Installing the direct extension rack cables.

___________________________________________________________________

3.3-1 TSX or PMX 47-40/67-40/87-40/107-40 basic PLC racks

If a discrete I/O direct extension rack is used, remove the connector cover plate

Install the direct extension cable

A B

120/121) or electrical (TSX LES 120) adapis used and prepare TSX LES 64/65/74/

75/70/71 cable connectors

___________________________________________________________________________

3/6

Preparing the racks and the configuration 3

_______________________________________________________________________________________

Open the cable connector and install the cables.

1 - Terminal block strap

2 - grounding braid to connect to TSX RAC

20/20W11/25 grounding strip

Close cable connector, install and identify.

Connect grounding braid to TSX RAC

20/20W11/25 grounding strip.

__________________________________________________________________________________________

3.3-2 Direct I/O extension racks

Remove the empty slot covers Remove the cover plate

Install the cable connecting the direct exInstall the empty slot covers tension rack to the basic PLC, or to the local or remote I/O extension

___________________________________________________________________________

3/7

_______________________________________________________________________________________

3.3-3 Local I/O extension racks

If a direct extension is used, remove the cover plate

Install the direct extension cable

Install :

TSX SUP power supply module

TSX LES 20 module

Addressing the TSX LES 61 and TSX LES 62 cable connectors on extension racks

1 - Terminal block strap

2 - grounding braid to connect to TSX RAC

20/20W11/25 grounding strip

Open the cable connector

___________________________________________________________________________

3/8

Preparing the racks and the configuration 3

_______________________________________________________________________________________

Set the address of the extension rack on the addressing jumpers

Connect the wiring of the TSX CBC connecting cables

Install connecting cables

Close the cable connector Install and number the cable connector.

Connect cable connector grounding braid

to TSX RAC 20/20W11/20 grounding strip.

___________________________________________________________________________

3/9

_______________________________________________________________________________________

3.3-4 Fiber optic or electrical remote I/O extension racks

If a direct extension is used, remove the cover plate

Install the direct extension connecting cable

Addressing the fiber optic (TSX LFS 200 or 201) or electrical (TSX LES 200) rackmaster modules

LFS 200

Set the switches as indicated on the addressing label.

CURSOR SWITCH POSITION

1 2 3 4 5 6

RUN

RACKS 2/3

Example :

TSX LFS 200 module installed in extension rack 6.

RACKS 4/5

RACKS 6/7

Addressing label

I/O

RACKS 8/9

Set the addressing switches as shown below.

1 2 3 4 5 6

RACKS A/B

RACKS C/D

Addressing switches RACKS E/F

Set the address of the extension rack on the addressing modules

Installing the modules

A B

Install the :

TSX SUP.. power supply module A

___________________________________________________________________________

3/10

Preparing the racks and the configuration 3

_______________________________________________________________________________________

3.3-5 Discrete modules and terminal blocks

Install the discrete I/O modules Install the terminal blocks

Install the covers if TSX BLK1, BLK2 or

BLK3 terminal blocks are used

Install the identifying labels

___________________________________________________________________________

3/11

_______________________________________________________________________________________

3.3-6 Analog modules and terminal blocks

Adapting the modules and terminal blocks

If necessary, configure the module

Configuration label

Terminal block a b

Positioning the jumpers

1 a - Terminal block locked b - Terminal block unlocked

1 - connecting screw for TSX RAC

20/20W11/25 grounding strip

(compulsory)

Remove the cover (the terminal block must be locked)

Install the wiring label

3/12

Install the cover

Preparing the racks and the configuration 3

_______________________________________________________________________________________

Installing the modules and terminal blocks

Attach the terminal block strap Install the module

Install the terminal block Install the label

Terminal block locking mechanism and connection of the metal pull-tab to the

TSX RAC 20/20W11/25 grounding strip

Identify the terminal block

Note :

The installation procedure for the TSX AXM 171/172 modules with their terminal block TSX BLK4 is the same as that described above.

___________________________________________________________________________

3/13

_______________________________________________________________________________________

3.3-7 Communication, counting and positioning modules

Install the module Identify the module

___________________________________________________________________________

3/14

Preparing the racks and the configuration 3

_______________________________________________________________________________________

3.3-8 Network modules

TSX MPT 104 module (TELWAY network)

Addressing and wiring the terminal block

Remove the terminal block cover

Using the label as a guide, set the station address on the addressing jumpers

Install the wiring Install the terminal block cover

___________________________________________________________________________

3/15

_______________________________________________________________________________________

Installing the module and its terminal block

Install the module Install and identify the terminal block

MAPWAY (TSX MAP 1074) and ETHWAY (TSX ETH 107) modules

Addressing the terminal block

Open the terminal block Set the addresses

Close the terminal block

Identify the terminal block (network and station address)

Install the module and terminal block (same as for the TSX MPT 104 module)

___________________________________________________________________________

3/16

________________________________________________________

Connecting the components Section 4

___________________________________________________________________________

4.1

Grounding

Page

4/3

4/4

______________________________________________________________________________________

4.2

Power supplies 4/5

4/5

4/6

______________________________________________________________________________________

4.3

Discrete I/O modules

4.3-8 Connecting 32-point discrete input modules with

4.3-9 Connecting 24-point discrete output modules with 4/29

4.3-10 Connecting 32-point discrete output modules with 4/32

4.3-11 Wiring terminal blocks TSX BLK1/BLK2/BLK3/BLK7/BLK8/BLK9 4/34

4/34

4/35

______________________________________________________________________________________

4.4

Local I/O extensions 4/37

______________________________________________________________________________________

4.5

Remote fiber optic I/O extensions 4/40

4/41

4/44

4/45

___________________________________________________________________________

4/1

________________________________________________________

Connecting the components Section 4

___________________________________________________________________________

4.6

Remote electrical I/O extensions

Page

4/46

4/47

_____________________________________________________________________________________

4.7

Integrated UNI-TELWAY port 4/50

______________________________________________________________________________________

4.8

Integrated FIPWAY port 4/52

4.8-2 Preparing TSX FP CA.../CC... cables and

4/52

4/53

4/55

______________________________________________________________________________________

4.9

Modules equipped with TSX BLK 4 terminal blocks 4/56

______________________________________________________________________________________

4.10

Cable routing 4/57

___________________________________________________________________________

4/2

Connecting the components 4

_______________________________________________________________________________________

4.1 Grounding

4.1-1 General

All components of the automated system should be grounded so as to provide :

●

Safety for personnel according to norm NF C15-100

A fixed electrical potential serving as a reference

Protection against radiated noise.

The earth ground of the factory or site should be reliable and of good quality. Otherwise a separate earth ground fulfilling these requirements should be specially made for the

PLC installation.

The complete PLC installation should have only one electrical grounding point, called the reference ground (RG). Physically, this grounding point can be either the grounding point of the enclosure, or the grounding point of the chassis. The diagram opposite illustrates the basic grounding rules that should be followed.

The power supplies should be connected to the reference ground by star connection.

This connection should be made as close as possible to the outputs of the power supplies of the basic PLC rack and the extension racks :

●

For AC power supplies, connect one of the leads to the reference ground.

For DC power supplies, connect the negative pole to the reference ground unless prevailing installation rules indicate otherwise.

The racks should be connected to the reference ground by a green and yellow copper wire of not less than 2.5 mm 2 (AWG 13).

Screw type grounding terminals marked are provided on the left side of the racks and on the front of the power supply modules.

The reference ground should be connected to the earth ground of the factory or site by a good quality copper braid of not less than 10 mm 2 (AWG 7). This connection must be direct, permanent and continuous.

Grounding strip TSX RAC 20/20W11/25

When the connection is made by :

●

● shielded I/O wiring (analog modules, MPT 10 modules, etc)

TSX LES .. cable connectors for local I/O extensions, remote I/O extensions, UNI-

●

TELWAY bus, FIPIO bus or FIPWAY network

TSX BLK4 terminal blocks for modules the TSX RAC

●●

grounding strip (supplied separately) must be mounted under the rack so that grounding strips and shielded ground wires, TSX LES

●●

cable connectors and

TSX BLK4 terminal blocks may be connected.

___________________________________________________________________________

4/3

_______________________________________________________________________________________

One end of the grounding strip 1 must be connected to the grounding terminal 2 on the side of the rack by a green and yellow copper wire of not less than 2.5 mm 2 (AWG 13) 3 .

The shielding of the I/O wiring must then be connected to one of the screw-type terminals

4 of the grounding strip located under the I/O module concerned.

Important

It is compulsory to connect the locking tab of the TSX BLK4 terminal blocks and the grounding braid of the TSX LES

●● cable connectors to the TSX RAC

●●

grounding strip (protection of personnel and operational safety).

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

4.1-2 Schematic diagram

4/4

PLC power supply

I/O AC supply

I/O DC supply

(a) RG

Connecting the components 4

_______________________________________________________________________________________

4.2 Power supplies

4.2-1 Terminal blocks

AC power supplies

Power supply modules

TSX SUP 40/702

Fan unit equipping racks

TSX RKN 8F/82F/82FW11

1 2 3

Shunt

110

110/220

Shunt

110

110/220

220

Alarm relay

110/220

220 VCA

Alarm relay

110/220

110 VCA

L N

TSX SUP 702

Power supply terminal

Voltage selector (110/220 VAC)

Temperature monitoring contact

The fan unit is fitted with a temperature probe that gives and output if the temperature exceeds 70

C. This information can be accessed on the spare contact

DC power supplies

Power supply modules

TSX SUP 41/61 TSX SUP 42/62

Fan unit equipping racks

TSX RKN 82FD/82FDW11

1 2 3

24V

+ 24 V

48V

+ 48 V

+ -

0 V 0 V

TSX SUP 61/62

Alarm relay Alarm relay

Power supply terminal

Voltage selector (24/28 VDC)

Temperature monitoring contact

The fan unit is fitted with a temperature

24 VDC 48 VDC probe that gives and output if the temperature exceeds 70

C. This information can be accessed on the spare contact

___________________________________________________________________________

4/5

_______________________________________________________________________________________

4.2-2 Connecting and slaving the power supplies

Connecting the power supplies

The diagram below illustrates the principle rules to be observed for connecting the power supplies.

KMØ/1

KSØ/1

KM4

6 7

KS4

KME

KSE

Inputs Outputs Inputs Outputs Inputs Outputs

2/3 5 F

0/1 4 E

1 Master switch S : isolates the complete installation.

Line contactor KM : isolates the installation.

3 Insulating transformer : to provide power for PLCs with AC power supplies.

Slave switches KM0/1, KM4,...., KME : to energize the power supplies of the racks and their associated inputs.

Slave switches KS0/1, ....., KSE to energize the outputs.

6 Adapter unit : for the supply to the inputs (if necessary).

Adapter unit : for the supply to the outputs (if necessary).

___________________________________________________________________________

4/6

Connecting the components 4

_______________________________________________________________________________________

. Slaving the power supplies

The diagram below shows how the power supplies can be slaved so as to provide cascaded start-up of the various pairs of racks, starting with the last extension rack, with :

- Energization of the TSX SUP.. modules and the inputs

- Energization of the outputs.

If a power supply module fails, one of the following actions can be taken :

- Either a complete halt of the application (with all outputs set to zero)

- Or continued execution of the application after the program has acquired the fault information through system bits SY40 to SY47 (in the diagram, this option is provided by the switches KSE-KS4 and KS4-KS0/1).

To conform to safety requirements, any restart after a power break or an emergency stop must be initiated by the operator (by depressing the ON pushbutton). An "OK" indicator light can be added to monitor correct operation. The fan contacts can also be used in the slaving system.

KME

OFF

KME

KM4 KMØ/1

Emergency stop

KSE

RALE

(1)

RAL4

(1)

RALØ/1

(1)

AU KS2

KSE KS4 KS4 KSØ/1

KME KSE

Racks E and F

TSX SUP... and inputs

Outputs

KM4

KS4 KMØ/1

KSØ/1

Racks 4 and 5

TSX SUP... and inputs

Outputs

Racks 0/1 and 2/3

TSX SUP... and inputs

Outputs

Slaving plan

Emergency stop

KSØ

OK light

_________

(1) Relay alarm contacts of each power supply

___________________________________________________________________________

4/7

_______________________________________________________________________________________

. Protection

The opening of the switches (KM., KS.) causes very high overvoltages and induced currents in the cables. To protect against this, the following protective devices should be installed as close as possible to the contacts of each switch :

- For AC voltages, a 250V-90 joule GMOV peak limiter

- For DC voltages, a diode

___________________________________________________________________________

4/8

Connecting the components 4

_______________________________________________________________________________________

4.3 Discrete I/O modules

4.3-1 Types of connection

Several different methods of wiring the 4, 8, and 16 point I/O modules can be used.

• I/O points with commons

In this case, the I/O points have power supply commons which can be created :

- By the module : each I/O point is connected to the terminal block by a single wire, the supply commons being created by the grouping of I/O points in the module. The

TSX BLK 1 terminal block permits this type of wiring (Example 1: connection to a series of pushbuttons on a console).

- By the terminal block : each I/O point is connected by two wires, the supply commons being created by the internal wiring of the terminal block. The TSX BLK

2 permits this type of wiring (Example 2 : connection to the sensors of an extended or distant process while avoiding the creation of noise due to ground loops).

- By the sensors and actuators : each I/O point is connected by a single wire, the power supply being common to all the I/O points of the module. The TSX BLK 3 terminal block permits this type of wiring (Example 3 : connection to a series of pushbuttons on a console).

+ —

TSX BLK 1

AI AI AI

0 0 0

AI 2

1 3

AI AI AI

1 2 4

AI 6

3 7

AI AI AI

2 4 8

AI A

5 B

AI AI AI

3 6 C

AI E

7 F

Example 1

TSX BLK 2

AI AI

0 0

2 4

3 6

1 2

Example 2

+ —

TSX BLK 3

AI AI

0 0

V 0

V 1

1 2

V 2

2 4

V 5

3 6

V 6

V 7

Example 3

___________________________________________________________________________

4/9

_______________________________________________________________________________________

• Independent I/O points

Each I/O point is independent and must therefore be individually supplied. The TSX

BLK 1 permits this type of wiring with certain modules (Example 4 : relay contacts in a series of safety interlocks).

TSX BLK 1

AI AI AI

0 0 0

AI 2

1 3

AI AI AI

1 2 4

AI 6

3 7

AI AI AI

2 4 8

AI A

5 B

AI AI AI

3 6 C

AI E

7 F

Example 4

Note :

The 24 and 32 point I/O modules can only accept terminal blocks (BLK 7/71, BLK8/81, BLK 9/91 according to the type).

___________________________________________________________________________

4/10

Connecting the components 4

_______________________________________________________________________________________

4.3-2 Module/terminal block combinations

Type of module

TSX DET 4 66

TSX DET 8 02/8 03

TSX DET 8 05

TSX DET 8 12/813

TSX DET 8 14/8 24

TSX DET 16 03/16 04

TSX DET 16 12/16 13

TSX DET 32 32/32 42

TSX DET 32 52

TSX DST 4 17

TSX DST 8 04

TSX DST 8 05

TSX DST 8 17

TSX DST 8 35

TSX DST 8 82

TSX DST 16 04

TSX DST 16 12

TSX DST 16 32/16 33

TSX DST 16 34

TSX DST 16 35

TSX DST 16 82

TSX DST 24 72

TSX DST 24 82

TSX DST 32 92

Types of connection and TSX BLK terminal blocks

Independent point

2 wires

/point

External commons

BLK1 BLK2 BLK3 BLK1 BLK7/71 BLK 8/81 BLK9/91

4/11

_______________________________________________________________________________________

4.3-3 Connecting 4-point discrete I/O modules

●

Input modules TSX DET 4 66 and output modules TSX DST 4 17 with terminal block TSX BLK 1

Independent

I/O points

I/O points with external commons

TSX BLK 1

AI AI AI

0 0 0

AI 2

1 3

AI AI AI

1 2 4

AI 6

3 7

AI AI AI

2 4 8

AI A

5 B

AI AI AI

3 6 C

AI E

7 F

X = Namur detector if

TSX DET 466

X = Actuator if

TSX DET 417

Note: The Namur inputs of module TSX DET 4 66 can be controlled by dry contacts wired as shown in the diagram below.

TSX BLK 1

AI AI AI

0 0 0

AI 2

1 3

AI AI AI

1 2 4

AI 6

3 7

AI AI AI

2 4 8

AI A

5 B

AI AI AI

3 6 C

AI E

7 F

TSX DET 466 with dry contacts.

12 K

2.2 K

TSX BLK 1

A/ A/ A

0 0 0

●

Input modules TSX DET 4 66 and output modules TSX DST 4 17 with terminal block TSX BLK 2

(See Divider E, Appendix 3, Section A3.1)

___________________________________________________________________________

4/12

Connecting the components 4

_______________________________________________________________________________________

4.3-4 Connecting 8-point discrete input modules

●

Input modules TSX DET 8 02/8 03/8 05/8 12/8 13/8 14/8 24 with terminal block

TSX BLK 1

Independent

I/O points

+ —

TSX BLK 1

AI AI AI

0 0 0

AI 2

1 3

AI AI AI

1 2 4

AI 6

3 7

AI AI AI

2 4 8

AI A

5 B

AI AI AI

3 6 C

AI E

7 F

I/O points with external commons

TSX BLK 1

+ —

AI AI AI

0 0 0

AI 2

1 3

AI AI AI

1 2 4

AI 6

3 7

2 4 8

AI AI AI

AI A

5 B

3 6 C

AI AI AI

AI E

7 F

Note :

For the connection of 3-wire proximity detectors, see Divider E, Appendix 4, Sections A4.2 and

A4.3

●

Input modules TSX DET 8 02/8 03/8 05/8 12/8 13/8 14/8 24 with terminal blocks

TSX BLK 2/BLK 3

(See Divider E, Appendix 3, Section A3.2)

___________________________________________________________________________

4/13

_______________________________________________________________________________________

4.3-5 Connecting 8-point discrete output modules

●

Output modules TSX DST 8 04/8 05 and TSX DST 8 35 (1) with terminal block

TSX BLK 1

Independent

I/O points

TSX BLK 1

AI AI AI

0 0 0

AI 2

1 3

AI AI AI

1 2 4

AI 6

3 7

AI AI AI

2 4 8

AI A

5 B

AI AI AI

3 6 C

AI E

7 F

I/O points with external commons

TSX BLK 1

AI AI AI

0 0 0

AI 2

1 3

AI AI AI

1 2 4

AI 6

3 7

AI AI AI

2 4 8

AI A

5 B

AI AI AI

3 6 C

AI E

7 F

_________

(1) Using N/O contacts only

___________________________________________________________________________

4/14

Connecting the components 4

_______________________________________________________________________________________

Output modules TSX DST 8 35 with terminal block TSX BLK 1 (continued)

Using N/C contacts of module

TSX DST 8 35

TSX BLK 1

AI AI AI

0 0 0

AI 2

1 3

AI AI AI

1 2 4

AI 6

3 7

AI AI AI

2 4 8

AI A

5 B

AI AI AI

3 6 C

AI E

7 F

●

Output modules TSX DST 8 04/8 05 and TSX DST 8 35 with terminal block

TSX BLK 2/BLK 3

(See Divider E, Appendix 3, Section A3.2)

___________________________________________________________________________

4/15

I/O points with external commons

— +

(F)

TSX BLK 1

0 0 0

AI AI AI

AI 2

1 3

1 2 4

AI AI AI

AI 6

3 7

AI AI AI

2 4 8

AI A

5 B

AI AI AI

3 6 C

AI E

7 F

TSX DST 8 82

(F) Fast acting fuse 16A

_______________________________________________________________________________________

●

Output modules TSX DST 8 17/8 82 with terminal block TSX BLK 1

I/O points with external commons

— +

TSX BLK 1

AI AI AI

0 0 0

AI 2

1 3

1 2 4

AI AI AI

AI 6

3 7

2 4 8

AI AI AI

AI A

5 B

3 6 C

AI AI AI

AI E

7 F

TSX DST 8 17

●

Output modules TSX DST 8 17 with terminal block TSX BLK 2/BLK 3

(See Divider E, Appendix 3, Section A3.2)

___________________________________________________________________________

4/16

Connecting the components 4

_______________________________________________________________________________________

4.3-6 Connecting 16-point discrete input modules

●

Input modules TSX DET 16 03/16 04/16 12/16 13 with terminal block TSX BLK 1

I/O points with external commons

+ —

TSX BLK 1

AI AI AI

0 0 0

AI 2

1 3

AI AI AI

1 2 4

AI 6

3 7

2 4 8

AI AI AI

AI A

5 B

3 6 C

AI AI AI

AI E

7 F

Note :

For the connection of 3-wire proximity detectors, see Divider E, Appendix 4, Section A4.1

___________________________________________________________________________

4/17

_______________________________________________________________________________________

4.3-7 Connecting 16-point discrete output modules

●

Output modules TSX DST 16 04/16 35 with terminal block TSX BLK 1

I/O points with external commons

(F)

TSX BLK 1

AI AI AI

0 0 0

AI 2

1 3

AI AI AI

1 2 4

AI 6

3 7

AI AI AI

2 4 8

AI A

5 B

AI AI AI

3 6 C

AI E

7 F

(F) Delayed action fuses 1.6A

___________________________________________________________________________

4/18

Connecting the components 4

_______________________________________________________________________________________

●

Output modules TSX DST 16 12/16 82 with terminal block TSX BLK 1 (continued)

(F)

—

TSX BLK 1

AI AI AI

0 0 0

AI 2

1 3

AI 6

AI AI AI

1 2 4

3 7

2 4 8

AI AI AI

AI A

5 B

AI AI AI

3 6 C

AI E

7 F

I/O points with external commons

— 24 VDC +

(F)

TSX DST 16 12

(F) Fast acting fuses 1A

TSX DST 16 82

(F) Fast acting fuses 8A

TSX BLK 1

AI AI AI

0 0 0

AI 2

1 3

AI AI AI

1 2 4

AI 6

3 7

AI AI AI

2 4 8

AI A

5 B

AI AI AI

3 6 C

AI E

7 F

___________________________________________________________________________

4/19

_______________________________________________________________________________________

●

Output module TSX DST 1632, with terminal block TSX BLK 1

I/O points with external commons.

Connecting with inductive loads.

(R) : Preload resistance

2.2 k

Ω

0.5w

(K) : Emergency stop

(EC) : Peak limiter (1) supplied with

TSX DST 1632

(F) : Semi-delayed action fuse

≤

4/20

Connecting the components 4

_______________________________________________________________________________________

Output module TSX DST 1632, with terminal block TSX BLK 1 (continued)

I/O points with external commons.

Connecting with resistive loads.

4/21

_______________________________________________________________________________________

●

Output module TSX DST 1633, with terminal block TSX BLK 1

I/O points with external commons.

Connecting with inductive loads.

Important

It is essential to have a protective circuit (RC or peak limiter) across each load.

With Telemecanique contactors, use the interference suppression modules (M) defined below.

Contactors

24V/48V

50V/127V

110V/240V

220V

4/22

LC1-D09 to D95

LA4-DA2E

LA4-DA2G

LA4-DA2U

LC1-F115 to F265 LC1-F400 to F780

LA9-F980

LA9-D09980

Connecting the components 4

_______________________________________________________________________________________

Output module TSX DST 1633, with terminal TSX BLK 1 (continued)

I/O points with external commons.

Connecting with resistive loads.

(F) Semi-delayed action fuse

___________________________________________________________________________

4/23

_______________________________________________________________________________________

●

Output module TSX DST 1634, with terminal block TSX BLK 1

I/O points with external commons.

Connecting with inductive loads.

VDC 0V

Warning

It is essential to have a "freewheel" diode D across the load to preserve the lifetime of the contacts.

(F)

(D)

TSX BLK 1

AI AI AI

0 0 0

AI 2

1 3

AI AI AI

1 2 4

AI 6

3 7

AI AI AI

2 4 8

AI A

5 B

AI AI AI

3 6 C

AI E

7 F

Schematic diagram of I/O point connection.

(F) Semi-delayed action fuse 4A

4/24

(D)

(F)

Connecting the components 4

_______________________________________________________________________________________

Output module TSX DST 16 34, with terminal block TSX BLK 1 (continued)

I/O points with external commons.

Connecting with resistive loads

VDC OV

(F)

TSX BLK 1

AI AI AI

0 0 0

AI 2

1 3

AI AI AI

1 2 4

AI 6

3 7

AI AI AI

2 4 8

AI A

5 B

AI AI AI

3 6 C

AI E

7 F

4/25

_______________________________________________________________________________________

4.3-8 Connecting 32-point discrete input modules with terminal blocks

TSX BLK 7 and TSX BLK 71

●

32-point input modules TSX DET 32 32 and TSX DET 32 42 with terminal block

TSX BLK7

Important

As the module TSX DET 3232 has fast response times, resulting in a lessening of its resistance to electromagnetic interference, it is strongly recommended that the input signal cables should be routed at a distance from the power cables.

Note

The module TSX DET 32 42 can be used in place of the module TSX DET 32 12

___________________________________________________________________________

4/26

Connecting the components 4

_______________________________________________________________________________________

●

32-point input modules TSX DET 32 52 with terminal block TSX BLK7

Important

It is essential that the 0V (common) of each terminal block TSX BLK 7 should be linked to the PLC grounding strip

TSX RAC 20 in order to avoid disturbing the PLC's operation by random currents in the 0V internal.

PLC ground

(TSX RAC 20)

___________________________________________________________________________

4/27

_______________________________________________________________________________________

●

32-point input modules TSX DET 32 32/32 42/32 52 with terminal block

TSX BLK 71 for modules ABE6-6

32 Inputs

24 VDC

1 2

Points 0 to 15

19 20

1 2

JI 5

Points 16 to 31

19 20

0 V

32 Inputs

BLK71

___________________________________________________________________________

4/28

Connecting the Components 4

_______________________________________________________________________________________

4.3-9 Connecting 24-point discrete output modules with terminal blocks

TSX BLK 8 and TSX BLK 81

●

24-point output module TSX DST 24 72 with terminal block TSX BLK 8

24 VDC

+ –

Reset pushbutton

RESET

24 Outputs

TSX BLK 8

24VDC

Important note :

The terminals 1, 8, 15 and 22 must be connected to the

+ 24V, even if a group of points is not used.

The module TXS DST 24 72 consists of 12 pairs of output points, each pair being protected against short-circuits and overloads by a thermal cut-out.

If a fault occurs on either of the outputs of a pair, the thermal cut-out is triggered and the pair concerned is disabled (the other pairs are unaffected). After the fault has disappeared, the module must be reset by pressing the reset pushbutton.

___________________________________________________________________________

4/29

_______________________________________________________________________________________

●

24-point output module TSX DST 24 82 with terminal block TSX BLK 8

24 VDC

–

Reset pushbutton

RESET

TSX BLK 8

24VDC

∗

Important note :

∗

The terminals 1, 8, 15 and 22 must be connected to the

+ 24V, even if a group of points is not used.

24 Outputs

G1 to G4 : groups of points

The maximum current per group of points as defined above is limited to 1.2 A for an ambient temperature of 55°C.

This module is protected against short-circuits and overloads by a thermal cut-out on each output.

If a fault occurs, the thermal cut-out is triggered and the output concerned is disabled

(the other outputs are unaffected). After the fault has disappeared, the module must be reset by pressing the reset pushbutton.

___________________________________________________________________________

4/30

Connecting the Components 4

_______________________________________________________________________________________

●

24-point output modules TSX DST 24 72/24 82 with terminal TSX BLK 81 for modules ABE-6.

24 Outputs

24 VDC

RESET

1 2

RESET

Points 0 to 15

Points 16 to 23

33 34

0 V

24 Outputs

BLK81

___________________________________________________________________________

4/31

_______________________________________________________________________________________

4.3-10 Connecting 32-point discrete output modules TSX DST 32 92 using terminal blocks TSX BLK 9 and TSX BLK91

●

32-point output module TSX DST 32 92 with terminal block TSX BLK 9

– 24 VDC

(F)

TSX BLK 9

24VDC

∗

32 Outputs

G1 to G4 : groups of points.

(F) fuse : 200 mA quick-acting on resistive load

160 mA delayed action on inductive load.

The maximum current per group of points as defined above is limited to 1.2 A for an ambient temperature of 55°C.

___________________________________________________________________________

4/32

Connecting the Components 4

_______________________________________________________________________________________

●

32-point output module TSX DST 32 92 with terminal block TSX BLK 91 for modules ABE-6

●●●

32 Outputs

24 VDC

1 2

JO 5

Points 0 to 15

19 20

1 2

JI 5

Points 16 to 31

19 20

0 V

32 Outputs

BLK91

___________________________________________________________________________

4/33

_______________________________________________________________________________________

4.3-11 Wiring terminal blocks TSX BLK 1/BLK 2/BLK 3/BLK 7/BLK 8/BLK 9

Proceed as follows :

• Remove the cable clamp 1

• Start by connecting the lower terminals and work upwards.

• Run each wire through the wiring guide and then along the wiring duct.

• After wiring is completed, re-install and tighten the cable clamp.

The terminal blocks can be wired even if the I/O modules are not installed, but the terminal blocks must be attached to the racks as shown below.

Attach the terminal block strap Hook the terminal block onto the rack

Clamping capacity

The screw terminals have a clamping capacity of 1 wire of 2.5 mm 2 (AWG 14) or 2 wires of 1.5 mm 2 (AWG 16).

However, to facilitate wiring it is recommended to use 1 wire of 1 mm 2 (AWG 14) fitted with an insulated cable end (Telemecanique reference DZ5-CE 010).

________________________________________________________________________________________

4.3-12 Wiring terminal blocks TSX BLK 71/81/91

As these terminal blocks are only used with ABE-6

●●●

modules, please refer to

TELEFAST system documentation.

___________________________________________________________________________

4/34

Connecting the Components 4

_______________________________________________________________________________________

4.3-13 Protecting the inputs and outputs

Before wiring the PLC configuration, it is essential to check that the environmental and service conditions are within the authorized limits (see Divider D, Section 1.2).

. Inputs : the inputs are protected by an efficient noise filter, nevertheless it is advisable to protect them against any loud electrical noise, such as the switching of inductive loads, by proceeding as follows :

- For preference, connect all sensors by individual pairs or, failing this, run the signal and return wires in the same multi-core cable so as to reduce the surface of the loops formed by these connections (multi-wire connection).

However, it is also possible to use a single common for several sensors, providing that the common and the signal wire are run in the same cable reserved exclusively for this purpose (single-wire connection).

Multi-wire connection Single-wire connection

Special case of Namur inputs (TSX DET 4 66)

The wiring should consist of shielded twisted pairs. A 200 mA fuse should be placed on the +24V power supply to each module to protect against polarity reversal.

___________________________________________________________________________

4/35

_______________________________________________________________________________________

. Outputs : all discrete outputs are protected against overvoltages and induced currents (which may occur in the wiring when actuators are turned on and off) by the following protection circuits :

AC and relay outputs

Each output point or relay contact is protected by an RC circuit (*) and a

GMOV peak limiter circuit (except TSX DST 16

33 which has an RC or peak limiter).

L2 fu

R Ge R Ge

C C

DC outputs

Each output point is protected :

• by a diode and a GMOV peak limiter circuit for 4,

8 and 16 point modules

(except TSX DST 835/

16 34 which has external diode)

• by a diode for 24 and

32 point modules.

Control circuit

Protection

+VA

Special case

In the case where a contact is inserted between the output point and the load, additional protection circuits of the type described below are necessary.

R C (*) D

—

Wherever possible, connections between outputs and actuators should be made in accordance with the recommendations for wiring inputs.

4/36

Connecting the Components 4

_______________________________________________________________________________________

4.4 Local I/O extensions

In a local extension configuration, electrical connections must be made between :

The processor module and the TSX LES 20 rackmaster module of the first extension rack 1

The TSX LES 20 rackmaster modules of the first and subsequent extension racks 2 .

For this purpose Telemecanique proposes TSX CBC ... electrical connecting cables of different lengths (1, 3, 5, 12, 20 and 30 meters).

Note :

The maximum distance between the processor module in the basic PLC and the last TSX LES 20 local extension rack must not exceed 30 meters.

Basis PLC Local extension Local extension

6 3 1 7 4 2 7 5

1 TSX CBC ... connecting cable

2 TSX CBC ... connecting cable

TSX LES 64 cable connector on processor module (if the processor has an integrated UNI-TELWAY port) or TSX LES 65 (if the processor has an integrated

FIPWAY port).

4 TSX LES 62 cable connector on intermediate rackmaster.

5 TSX LES 61 cable connector on end rackmaster.

6 TSX P

●●

or T PMX P

●● processor module.

TSX LES 20 local rackmaster module.

___________________________________________________________________________

4/37

_______________________________________________________________________________________

Preparing the TSX LES 64 cable connector (for processor with integrated UNI-

TELWAY port)

Open the cover.

Connect one end of the TSX CBC ...

cable to the connector marked JJ.

The second connector (JH) permits connection of the UNI-TELWAY bus to processors with the integrated UNI-

TELWAY port; the switches are for setting the PLC address on the UNI-

TELWAY bus (see Divider B, Section

4.7).

Close the cover.

Fit the cable connector on the 26-pin connector on the processor and identify it.

Connect the ground wire of the cable connector to the rack grounding strip

TSX RAC 20.

SW1 ON

1 2 3 4 5 6

Preparing the TSX LES 65 cable connector (for processor with integrated FIPWAY port)

Open the cover.

Connect the end of the TSX CBC ...

cable to the connector marked JF.

The screw terminal permits connection of the FIPIO bus or FIPWAY network to processors with the integrated FIPWAY port; the switches are for setting the station and network address when using

FIPIO bus or FIPWAY network (see

Divider B, Section 4.8).

Close the cover.

Fit the cable connector on the 26-pin connector on the processor and identify it.

Connect the ground wire of the cable connector to the rack grounding strip

TSX RAC 20.

STA

+ 1 – + 2 –

___________________________________________________________________________

4/38

Connecting the Components 4

_______________________________________________________________________________________

Preparing the TSX LES 62 intermediate cable connector

Open the connector.

Connect the TSX CBC ... cable from the processor to the connector marked IN.

Connect one end of the TSX CBC ...

cable to the connector marked OUT.

The other end of this cable connects to the rackmaster module in the next local extension rack.

Set the address of the rack on the addressing switches (see Divider A,

Section 12.1-3 on addressing local extension racks).

Close the cover

Fit the cable connector on the 15-pin connector on the TSX LES 20 local rackmaster module and label it.

Connect the ground wire of the cable connector to the rack grounding strip

TSX RAC 20.

OUT IN

Preparing the TSX LES 61 end cable connector

Open the connector.

Connect the TSX CBC ... cable to the connector marked IN. This cable comes from the processor module if there is only one extension rack, or from the previous extension rack if there is more than one.

Set the address of the rack on the addressing switches (see Divider A,

Section 12.1-3 on addressing local extension racks).

Close the cover.

Fit the cable connector on the 15-pin connector on the TSX LES 20 local rackmaster module and label it.

Connect the ground wire of the cable connector to the rack grounding strip

TSX RAC 20.

___________________________________________________________________________

4/39

_______________________________________________________________________________________

4.5 Remote fiber optic I/O extensions

In a remote extension configuration, two types of connections must be made :

. Electrical connections :

- Between the processor module and the first TSX LFS 120 or 121 fiber optic module

1 ,

- and, if necessary between the first and second TSX LFS 120 or 201 fiber optic modules 2 ,

Basic PLC

1 2

. Fiber optic connections :

- Between the TSX LFS 120 or 121 fiber optic adapter module and the TSX LFS 200 or 201 fiber optic rackmaster module 3 ,

- Between the two TSX LFS 200 or 201 fiber optic rackmaster modules

3 4

Basic PLC Remote extension Remote extension

For these connections Telemecanique proposes :

●

A connecting cable 0.35 meters long for the electrical connections.

●

Two pre-equipped fiber optic cables of 5 and 30 meters long for the fiber optic connections. These cables can only be used with TSX LFS 120 and TSX LFS 200 modules.

For cable runs of over 30 meters, a user supplied fiber optic cable of the type GI 100/

140 (NA=0.29) must be spliced to the pre-equipped FO cables.

The cutting and splicing of FO cable must be done by qualified specialists (contact your regional technical representative) and the optical consumption of the connecting links must be verified (see Divider E, Appendix 5).

Module TSX LFS 121 and TSX LFS 201 is not supplied with pre-equipped fiber optic cables. If this module is used, see Divider A, Section 8.3-5 defining the cable characteristics and the connections to be used.

___________________________________________________________________________

4/40

Connecting the Components 4

_______________________________________________________________________________________

4.5-1 Electrical connections

1 Processor module.

TSX LFS 120 or 121 fiber optic adapter module.

3 TSX LES 74 cable connector (if processor with UNI-TELWAY port) or TSX

LES 75 (if processor with FIPWAY port).

4 TSX LES 70 cable connector.

5 TSX CBC 003 connecting cable.

TSX CBC ... connecting cable if there is a local extension.

7 TSX LES 71 intermediate cable connector.

1 3 5 4 2 6

1 3 5 7 4 2 6

Preparing the TSX LES 74 cable connector (for processor with UNI-TELWAY port)

Open the cover,

Connect one end of the TSX CBC 003 cable to the connector marked (JJ). The second connector (JH) permits connection to the UNI-TELWAY bus; the switches are for setting the PLC address on the UNI-TELWAY bus (see Divider B,

Section 4.7).

Close the cover.

Fit the cable connector on the 26-pin connector on the processor and label it.

Connect the ground wire of the cable connector to the rack grounding strip

TSX RAC 20.

SW1 ON

1 2 3 4 5 6

___________________________________________________________________________

4/41

_______________________________________________________________________________________

Preparing the TSX LES 75 intermediate cable connector (for processor with integrated FIPWAY port)

Open the cover.

Connect one end of the TSX CBC ...

cable to the connector marked JF.

The screw terminal permits connection to the FIPIO bus or FIPWAY network for processors with the integrated FIPWAY port; the switches are for setting the station and network address if FIPIO bus or FIPWAY network is used (see

Divider B, Section 4.8).

Close the cover.

Fit the cable connector on the 26-pin connector of the processor and label it.

Connect the cable connector ground wire to the rack grounding strip TSX

RAC 20.

STA

+ 1 – + 2 –

Preparing the TSX LES 71 intermediate cable connector

(if two TSX LFS 120 or TSX LFS 121 modules are used)

Open the cover.

Connect the TSX CBC 003 cable coming from the processor to the connector marked B.

Connect one end of the second TSX

CBC 003 cable to the connector marked

A. The other end of this cable is connected to the second fiber optic adapter module.

Close the cover.

Fit the cable connector to the 15-pin connector on the TSX LFS 120 or TSX

LFS 121 fiber optic adapter module and label it.

Connect the cable connector ground wire to the rack grounding strip TSX

RAC 20.

A B

___________________________________________________________________________

4/42

Connecting the Components 4

_______________________________________________________________________________________

Preparing the TSX LES 70 cable connector

Open the cover.

Connect the TSX CBC 003 cable to the connector marked B. This cable comes from the processor module if only one

TSX LFS 120 or 121 fiber optic adapter module is used, or from the first fiber optic adapter module if two such modules are used.

If necessary, connect one end of the second TSX CBC... cable to the connector marked A. The other end of this cable connects to a local extension rack.

Close the cover.

Fit the cable connector to the 15-pin connector of the TSX LFS 120 or TSX

LFS 121 fiber optic module.

Connect the cable connector ground wire to the rack grounding strip TSX

RAC 20.

A B

___________________________________________________________________________

4/43

_______________________________________________________________________________________

4.5-2 Fiber optic connections with TSX LFS 120/200 modules

. Pre-equipped cables

The TSX CBD 050 (5 meters) and TSX CBD 300 (30 meters) pre-equipped fiber optic cables are composed as follows :

3 2 1 4

1 Protective sheath containing the two optical fibers (transmission and reception).

2 Y-junction.

3 Screw connector with rubber protective sleeve permitting rapid connection of the optical fiber.

4 Marked and colour-coded fiber identifying sleeve :

- Blue sleeve marked Rx equals reception fiber,

- Black sleeve marked Tx equals transmission fiber.

Note :

To ensure protection against electrostatic discharges, the connectors

must be screwed in through their rubber protective sleeves (no direct contact between metallic parts).

. User supplied FO cable

For distances of more than 30 meters, a user-supplied FO cable must be spliced to the pre-equipped FO cable as shown in the diagram below. The cutting and splicing of FO cable must be done by qualified specialists (contact your regional technical representative). The optical consumption of the connecting links must be verified (see Divider E, Appendix 5).

Optic module Junction box Junction box Optic module

LFS 120

OUT

Ch 1

OUT

LFS 200

RUN

TX IN

OUT

Ch 2

OUT

First half of

TSX CBD ...

cable

User FO cable Second half of TSX CBD

...

cable

OUT

I/O

___________________________________________________________________________

4/44

Connecting the Components 4

_______________________________________________________________________________________

. Examples of fiber optic cable connections

TSX LFS 200

♦∅

TSX LFS 200 TSX LFS 120

♦∅

TSX LFS 200

LFS 120

OUT

Ch 1

OUT

LFS 200

RUN

TX IN

OUT

Ch 2

OUT

I/O

LFS 200

RUN

TX IN

LFS 200

RUN

TX IN

OUT

I/O

OUT

I/O

1 Fiber marked Tx (black)

Fiber marked Rx (blue)

_________________________________________________________________________________________

4.5-3 Fiber optic connections with TSX LFS 121/201 modules

In this case, as Telemecanique does not provide pre-equipped cables, the user must choose a fiber optic cable that responds to the characteristics defined in Divider A,

Section 8.3-5. The cable is connected to the modules by an ST type connector with a ceramic ferrule and metal body. Typical insertion loss < 5 dB.

___________________________________________________________________________

4/45

_______________________________________________________________________________________

4.6 Remote electrical I/O extensions

A remote electrical I/O extension requires several types of connections :

• Connections to the basic PLC

- between the processor and the TSX LES 120 electrical adapter module,

- possible connection between two TSX LES 120 electrical adapter modules,

• Connections basic PLC/extension or extension/extension.

______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

4.6-1 Connections to the basic PLC

Electrical connections

1 Processor module

TSX LES 120 electrical adapter module.

3 TSX LES 74 cable connector (if processor with UNI-TELWAY port) or TSX

LES 75 (if processor with FIPWAY port).

4 TSX LES 70 cable connector.

5 TSX CBC 003 connecting cable.

TSX CBC ... connecting cable if there is a local extension.

7 TSX LES 71 intermediate cable connector.

Basic PLC with 1 TSX LES

120 module

Basic PLC with 2 TSX LES

120 modules

7 4

Preparing TSX LES 74/75/70/71 cable connectors

These cable connectors are prepared in exactly the same way as for fiber optic remote extensions (see Divider B, Section 4.5-1).

___________________________________________________________________________

4/46

Connecting the Components 4

_______________________________________________________________________________________

4.6-2 Connection basic PLC/extension or extension/extension

This connection is made by two elements :

• A tap link kit

1 made up of a cable connector, a cable and a 15-pin SUB D connector for connection to TSX LES 120 or TSX LES 200 modules.

Two kits are offered :

- TSX LES 805, kit with 5-meter cable,

- TSX LES 810, kit with 10-meter cable,

• a main cable 2 to connect to the tap junction box.

channel 1 channel 1

1 2 1 2 1

Basic PLC

Extension Extension

Connection of tap junction boxes

According to the above architecture, several possibilities can occur :

• Tap link to basic PLC rack

The tap junction box permits the tap link of a channel (BUS architecture) or two channels (star architecture).

In Bus architecture, the tap link of the channel is made either to connector JB for a right-hand tap link (see example 1) or JA for a left-hand tap link (see example 2).

Switch S1 should be in the "OFF" position.

In star architecture, the tap link of one channel is made to connector JB, the tap link of the other channel to connector JA. Switch S1 should be in the "OFF" position.

• Intermediate junction

In this case, the tap junction box acts as a relay between the previous rack and the following rack. The link coming from the basic PLC rack or from the previous extension should be connected systematically to connector JA (see examples 1 and 2), the link to the following rack is connection to the other connector JB. The switch should be in the "OFF" position.

___________________________________________________________________________

4/47

_______________________________________________________________________________________

• End junction

The tap junction box does not provide a link to the other racks. The link coming from the previous rack should be connected to connector JA (see example below). The switch should be in the "ON" position.

Example 1 : Tap link of a channel to the basic PLC through connector JB

OFF

JA JB

OFF

JA JB

Basic PLC Extension Extension

Example 2 : Tap link of a channel to the basic PLC through connector JA

OFF

JA JB

OFF

JA JB

Basic PLC Extension Extension

___________________________________________________________________________

4/48

Connecting the Components 4

_______________________________________________________________________________________

Example 3 : Tap link of 2 channels to the basic PLC

JA JB

OFF

JA JB

Extension Basic PLC Extension

Wiring diagram of a tap junction box

The colour marking code on the printed circuit board enables the various conductors of the main cable TSX CB

●●●

to be connected without difficulty. It is only a matter of connecting the conductor which is the same colour as that displayed on the printed circuit.

In order to ensure continuity of grounding, the metal braid of the cable should be carefully inserted under the cable clamp which itself ensures continuity of ground with the cable connector when it is fitted.

Note

For more information about ground wiring, consult the manual "Recommendations for PLC

Installation Wiring TSX DG GND E".

metal cable clamp metal braid metal braid metal cable clamp

Yellow

Blue

Black

Orange

Green

Red

Yellow

Blue

Orange

Black

Red

Green

TSX CB

●●● TSX CB

●●● cable cable

___________________________________________________________________________

4/49

_______________________________________________________________________________________

4.7 Integrated UNI-TELWAY port

The following processors are equipped with UNI-TELWAY port control interface :

• Version V5 processors : TSX or TPMX P47 425/P67 425/P87 425/P 107 425,

• Version V4 processors : TSX P47 411 and TSX or TPMX P47 420/P67 420/P87 420/

P107420.

The connection to the processor module is made by :

• The TSX LES 64 cable connector 1 if the configuration has only a local I/O extension.

• The TSX LES 74 cable connector 2 if the configuration has a remote I/O extension.

The connection to the UNI-TELWAY bus is made through a TSX CSD 100 cable (10 meters long) or a TSX CSD 200 cable (20 meters long) and a TSX SCA 50 tap junction box.

TSX SCA 50

TSX CSD 100

TSX CSD 200

___________________________________________________________________________

4/50

Connecting the Components 4

_______________________________________________________________________________________

Preparing the TSX LES 64 or TSX LES 74 cable connector

Connect the end of the TSX CSD 100 or

200 cable fitted with a connector to the connector marked (JH). The second connector marked (JJ) permits connection to a local I/O extension (TSX LES

64) or to a remote I/O extension (TSX

LES 74).

Close the cover.

Fit the cable connector to the 26-pin connector of the processor and identify it.

Connect the ground wire of the cable connector to the rack grounding strip

TSX RAC 20.

To extensions

To TSX SCA 50

SW1 ON

1 2 3 4 5 6

Preparing the TSX SCA 50 tap junction box

Open the junction box.

Install the cable glands.

Connect the free end of the TSX CSD 100 or 200 cable to the central connector as shown in the diagram below (the two other connectors are used to make the connections to the UNI-TELWAY bus).

Close the junction box.

0VL 0VL D(A) D(B)

Shielding

White

2 3

Red White

Blue

Isolating sleeve

(mandatory)

Setting the address of the PLC on the UNI-TELWAY bus

This is done by setting the dip-switches inside the TSX LES 64 or TSX LES 74

Parity

Address cable connector as shown in the diagram opposite. (Eg. coding station address 31).

1 2 3 4 5 6

The number of dip-switches in the off position must always be odd, achieved by

OFF

Binary value P 16 8 4 2 1 setting the parity switch.

Note :

For the software installation and use of the UNI-TELWAY port, refer to the manual TSX DM UTW.

___________________________________________________________________________

4/51

_______________________________________________________________________________________

4.8 Integrated FIPWAY port

4.8-1 Introduction

Version V5 processors TSX P47 415 and TSX or TPMX P47 455/P67 455/P87 455/P

107 455 are equipped with a control interface for a FIPIO bus or FIPWAY network.

The connection to the processor module is made by :

●

The TSX LES 65 cable connector 1 if the configuration has only a local I/O extension.

In this case, only tap link wiring is possible.

Example 1

1 To local extension

TSX LES 20

TSX FP CCxxx cable

FIPWAY network

TSX FP ACC4

End

TSX FP CAxxx cable

End

●

The TSX LES 75 cable connector 2 if the configuration has a remote I/O extension

(electrical or fiber optic). In this case, only tap link wiring is possible.

Example 2

To remote extension rack

TSX CBC 003 cable

TSX FP CCxxx cable

FIPIO Bus

TSX FP ACC4

End

TSX FP CAxxx cable

End

___________________________________________________________________________

4/52

Connecting the Components 4

_______________________________________________________________________________________

●

Either the TSX LES 65/75 cable connector if the configuration has neither a local nor remote I/O extension. In this case, either tap link or daisy chain cabling can be used.

Example of daisy chain connection

FIPWAY network

End TSX FP CAxxx cable

End

Note :

All the connections to a FIPIO bus or a FIPWAY network are described in detail in the following manual : FIPWAY reference manual TSX DR FIP V5E

The connections described below are only for TSX LES 65 and 75 cable connectors.

________________________________________________________________________________________

4.8-2 Preparing TSX FP CA.../CC... cables and TSX LES 65/75 cable connectors

Preparing the cables

In order to connect one or more shielded twisted pairs, prepare each cable as follows :

1 Cut back about 8 cm of the insulation sleeve.

8 cm

2 braid

2 Turn back the grounding braid on the cable sheath as shown opposite.

sheath

3 Turn the grounding braid back on itself a second time, then trim the sheath to expose the wires.

3 braid

4 Cut the wires so that they are about 4 cm long and expose about 5 mm of each wire and fit it with a wire end.

2 cm 4 cm sheath

5 mm

___________________________________________________________________________

4/53

_______________________________________________________________________________________

Wiring TSX LES 65 and TSX LES 75 cable connectors

The various cables are connected by a screw terminal for FIPWAY cables and by the connector JF for links to the extensions. Installation is as follows :

1 Open the cable connector.

2 To access the screw terminal, slide out the cable connector board.

3 Prepare the cables as previously described, then fix each conductor into the screw terminal, respecting the pairing and polarity of the conductors :

Red (+) / Green (-) and Orange (+) / Black (-). The following wiring diagrams illustrate the various possible types of connection : by daisy chain or tap link.

4 Replace the board in the cable connector.

5 Position the cables, with their grounding braid turned back, under the earth connecting bar then tighten the bar.

6 Remove the tab(s) on the cover so that the cable(s) can run freely.

7 Replace the cover and fasten.

8 Replace the cable connector on the processor, fasten it and connect the cable connector ground wire to the rack grounding strip TSX RAC 20.

STA STA

+ 1 – + 2 –

R G R G JA

R : Red

G : Green

O : Orange

B : Black

1 2 earth connecting bar

+ 1 – + 2 –

R G O B JA

Daisy chain connection Tap link connection

If the PLC is situated at the start or at the end of the FIPWAY segment, only cable 1 is connected to the cable connector. In this case, cable 2 must be replaced by a TSX

In this diagram, cable

is a tap link cable type TSX FP CCxxx. If the tap link is made by 2 cables of type TSX FP CA xxx, connection is the same as that for daisy chain.

FP ACC7 line termination.

___________________________________________________________________________

4/54

Connecting the Components 4

_______________________________________________________________________________________

4.8-3 Setting the addresses

PLC address on FIPIO bus

The PLC, on the FIPIO bus only, has the address 0. This address should be defined in the TSX LES 65 or TSX LES 75 connector terminal block which connects the PLC to the bus. In order to do this, microswitches SW1 (Station) and SW2 (Network) should be set at ON.

NET STA

SW2 SW1

Station address and network address on FIPWAY network

NET

Processors equipped with the integrated

FIP port should be assigned a unique address on the network.

The network address (NET) and the station address (STA) are set by two blocks de microcontacts situated in the TSX LES

65 and 75 cable connectors.

STA

SW2 SW1

Example for FIPWAY

Network 10 and Station 15

Each microswitch is assigned a binary value. Microswitch 8 is assigned the binary value 1, microswitch 7 is assigned the binary value 2, ..., and microswitch 1 is assigned the binary value 128.

A microswitch set at ON corresponds to the binary value 0.

___________________________________________________________________________

4/55

_______________________________________________________________________________________

4.9 Modules equipped with TSX BLK 4 terminal blocks

The instructions for wiring the special-purpose and intelligent modules (other than discrete I/O modules) are given in the specialist manuals for these modules. This section merely gives some general recommendations concerning the installation and wiring of modules fitted with TSX BLK 4 terminal blocks (analog modules, counting and positioning modules, etc).

The procedure is as follows

Remove the terminal block cover (the terminal block should be locked in place)

Preparing the cables

A 10 cm length of insulation should be stripped from shielded cables and the shielding twisted to the same length

Wiring the terminal block :

• Remove the cable clamp.

• Start by connecting the lower terminals and work up.

• Run each wire through the wiring guides and then along the wiring ducts.

Note :

The insulation must be taken into the terminal block and stop level with the terminals (to avoid shorting).

Connect the shield to the grounding strip Install the terminal block cover

(supplied separately)

___________________________________________________________________________

4/56

Connecting the Components 4

_______________________________________________________________________________________

All the normal precautions concerning the wiring and protection of electronic equipment in an industrial environment should be observed. In particular the following recommendations should be complied with as far as possible :

. Inside the enclosures

All power circuit wiring (connected to power supplies, power contactors, solenoids, etc) should be kept separate from input/output wiring.

- Discrete I/O modules

Input wiring 1 and output wiring 2 should be separately bundled and kept as far apart as possible. This should be kept in mind when planning the installation of the

I/O modules, so that the input modules can be grouped on one side of the rack and the output modules on the other.

If this is not possible, the input and output wiring can be grouped, but the AC output wiring should be ducted separately from the DC output wiring.

___________________________________________________________________________

4/57

_______________________________________________________________________________________

- Analog modules

All wires carrying analog information should be kept separate from the discrete I/O wiring (especially from relay outputs) and from power cables.

- Intelligent modules

The wiring for these modules should be kept separate to avoid line coupling.

The recommendations for wiring the various intelligent modules are given in the specialized manual for each module.

. Outside the enclosure

Depending on the type of modules installed in the PLC, separate cable ducts should be provided for :

- Power circuit wiring and power cables.

- Input and output cables to discrete I/O modules.

- All cables carrying low level signals, discrete I/O data for Namur modules or analog data for analog modules.

Multi-pair cable grouping is possible for signals of the same type and with the same reference ground.

Whenever possible it is also recommended to :

- Avoid parallel routing over long distances.

- Ensure that cable crossings are made at right angles.

FIPWAY, TELWAY, MAPWAY, ETHWAY network cables

These cables should be inside buildings. They should not be :

- exposed to weather or mechanical damage,

- run underground,

- run close to power cables.

The installation instructions for these cables are given in the corresponding specialized manuals.

___________________________________________________________________________

4/58

________________________________________________________

Start-up and Divider C

Start-up

Page

1/1

1.1 Module indicator lights

1.2 Initial power-up procedure

1.3 Discrete I/O connection check

______________________________________________________________________________________

Maintenance 2/1

2/1

2.1 General

2.2 Troubleshooting using the indicator lights

___________________________________________________________________________

C/1

________________________________________________________

Start-up and Divider C

___________________________________________________________________________

C/2

________________________________________________________

Start-up Section 1

___________________________________________________________________________

1.1

Module indicator lights

1.1-3 TSX LES ../TSX LFS ... modules for local or remote

1.1-7 TSX AEM 4.../TSX AEM 8.../TSX AEM 16..

1.1-8 TSX ASR 401/402/403/200

1.1-9 TSX CTM 100/DTM 100/DMR 1652/ AXM 171 1/7

1/8

1/9

1/10

____________________________________________________________________________________

1.2

Initial power-up procedure 1/11

1.2-4 Discrete I/O modules (TSX DET../DST) and

1/16 1.2-5 Serial communication modules (TSX SCM ....)

Counting and positioning modules (TSX DTM 100)

1.2-6 Analog modules (TSX AEM .../ASR ...)

Counting and positioning modules (TSX CTM 100,

1/16

1.2-8 MAPWAY (TSX MAP 1074) and ETHWAY

1/17

1/18

Page

_______________________________________________________________________________________

1.3

Discrete I/O connection check 1/19

___________________________________________________________________________

1/1

_______________________________________________________________________________________

1.1 Module indicator lights

Each module is equipped with indicator lights that facilitate the start-up, diagnostics and maintenance of model 40 PLCs.

_____________________________________________________________________

1.1-1 TSX SUP.. power supply modules

●

Green OK light : On if the internal voltages necessary for the operation of the PLC are present and correct.

●

Orange ON light : On if the AC supply voltage is present and correct.

_____________________________________________________________________

1.1-2 TSX P... or TPMX P... processor modules

●

Green RUN light : On if the processor is in operation

(program running).

●

Red CPU light : On if there is a processor fault.

●

Red MEM light : On if there is a user memory fault.

●

Red I/O light : On if there is an I/O fault.

●

Red UTW or FIP light

UTW light (UNI-TELWAY link) On if :

- The communication module integrated with the processor is not participating in the data exchanges.

- There is a parity fault in the terminal block.

- There is a fault in the EPROM or RAM memory of the communication module during the self-tests.

RUN

CPU

MEM

I/0

UTW

FIP light (FIPWAY link) :

- On if the FIPWAY segment cannot be used.

- Blinking if a function mode is downgraded compared to the required function.

___________________________________________________________________________

1/2

Start-up 1

_______________________________________________________________________________________

1.1-3 TSX LES... and TSX LFS... modules for local or remote I/O extensions

TSX LES 20, TSX LES 200, TSX LFS 200/201 modules

●

Green RUN light : On if the module is operating correctly.

●

Red I/O light : On if there is an I/O fault in the rack controlled by the module.

RUN

I/0

TSX LES 120, TSX LFS 120/121 modules

●

Green OK light : On if the module is operating correctly.

_____________________________________________________________________

1.1-4 TSX DET.../DST... discrete I/O modules

TSX DET input modules

●

On 4, 8, 16, and 32 point modules, 1

red status light per point : On if the input is at state 1.

●

On the TSX DET 4 66 4-point module,

1 red fault light per point (F0, F1, F2,

F3) : On if there is a line fault on the input.

___________________________________________________________________________

1/3

_______________________________________________________________________________________

Discrete I/O modules (continued)

TSX DST output modules

●

On the 4, 8, 16, 24, and 32 point mod-

ules, 1 red status light per point : On if the output is at state 1.

●

On the TSX DST 4 17 4-point module,

1 red fault light per point (F0, F1, F2,

F3) : On if there is a fault on the output

(overload or short-circuit).

●

On the 8-point modules and the TSX

DST 16 82 16-point module, 1 red fault

light (F) : On if there is a blown fuse or short-circuit on an output.

_____________________________________________________________________

1.1-5 TSX AXT 200 counting module

For each channel :

●

Red fault light (F) : On if the counting capacity is exceeded.

●

Red IN0 and IN1 lights : On if the counting inputs are at state 1.

●

Red RST light : On if the reset input is at state 1.

●

Red INH light : On if the inhibition input is at state 1.

IN0

IN1

RST

INH

___________________________________________________________________________

1/4

Start-up 1

_______________________________________________________________________________________

1.1-6 TSX ADT.../AST... analog modules

TSX ADT 201/202/203 analog input modules

●

Red 0A light : On if threshold A of channel 0 is crossed.

●

Red 0B light : On if threshold B of channel 0 is crossed.

●

Red 1A light : On if threshold A of channel 1 is crossed.

●

Red 1B light : On if threshold B of channel 1 is crossed.

ØA

ØB

TSX AST 200 analog output modules

This module has no indicator lights.

______________________________________________________________________

1.1-7 TSX AEM 4../AEM 8.. analog input modules

TSX AEM 411/412/413 modules

●

Red fault light (F) : On if the module has failed (inoperative).

●

Green OK light : On if the module is operating correctly.

●

Red ERR Ch 0 light : On if there is a fault on channel 0.

●

Red ERR Ch 1 light : On if there is a fault on channel 1.

●

Red ERR Ch 2 light : On if there is a fault on channel 2.

●

Red ERR Ch 3 light : On if there is a fault on channel 3.

CHØ

ERR

CH1

CH2

CH3

___________________________________________________________________________

1/5

_______________________________________________________________________________________

Analog input modules (continued)

TSX AEM 811/AEM 821/AEM 1601/AEM 1602/1613/AEM 1212 modules

●

Red fault light (F) : On if the module has failed (inoperative).

●

Green OK light : On if the module is operating correctly.

●

Red ERRor light : On if an application fault appears on one of the channels

(signal beyond limits, sensor malfunction or computing overflow).

ERR

_______________________________________________________________________

1.1-8 TSX ASR 401/402/403/200 analog output modules

TSX ASR 401/402/403 or TSX ASR 800 modules

●

Red fault light (F) : On if the module has failed (inoperative).

●

Green OK light : On if the module is operating correctly.

●

Red ERRor light : On if an application fault appears on one of the channels

(absence of power supply on one of the outputs, wiring fault on one of the channels, saturation of the digital values).

ERR

TSX ASR 200 module

This module has no indicator lights.

___________________________________________________________________________

1/6

Start-up 1

_______________________________________________________________________________________

1.1-9 TSX CTM 100/DTM 100/DMR 1652/AXM 171 counting and positioning modules

TSX CTM 100 module

●

Red fault light (F) : On if the module has failed (inoperative).

●

Green OK light : On if the module is operating correctly.

●

Red status lights O.0, O.1, O.2 : On if the corresponding outputs are activated

(the 4 th output has no indicator light).

●

Red status lights IN0, IN1, IN2, IN3,

IN4 : On if the corresponding inputs are at state 1.

INØ

IN1

IN2

IN3

IN4

0.Ø

0.1

0.2

TSX DTM 100 module

●

Red fault light (F) : On if the module has failed (inoperative).

●

Green OK light : On if the module is operating correctly.

●

Red status lights O.0, O.1, O.2 : On if the corresponding outputs are activated

(the 4 th output has no indicator light).

●

Red status lights IN0, IN1 : On if the corresponding inputs are at state 1.

O.Ø

O.1

O.2

INØ

IN1

___________________________________________________________________________

1/7

_______________________________________________________________________________________

TSX DMR 16 52 module

●

Red failure light : On if the module has failed (inoperative).

●

Green OK light : On if the module is operating correctly.

●

Red status lights OUT 0 to OUT 7 : On if the corresponding outputs are activated.

●

Red fault light (Def) : On if an application fault appears on one of the outputs.

Fail

OUT Ø

OUT

Def

TSX AXM 171 module

●

Red fault light (F) : On if the module has failed (inoperative).

●

Green OK light : On if the module is operating correctly.

●

Red status lights R0, R1, R2 : On if the corresponding outputs are activated (the

4 th output has no indicator light).

●

Red status lights IN0, IN1, IN2, IN3,

IN4 : On if the corresponding inputs are at state 1.

RØ

INØ

IN1

IN2

IN3

IN4

________________________________________________________________________________________

1.1-10 TSX AXM 172/182 axis control modules

●

Red fault light (F) : On if the module has failed (inoperative).

●

Green OK light : On if the module is operating correctly.

●

Red status lights R0, R1, R2 : On if the corresponding outputs are activated (the

4 th output has no indicator light).

Red status lights IN0, IN1, IN2, IN3,

IN4 : On if the corresponding inputs are at state 1.

RØ

INØ

IN1

IN2

IN3

IN4

___________________________________________________________________________

1/8

Start-up 1

_______________________________________________________________________________________

1.1-11 TSX AXM 292/492 axis control modules

●

Red fault light (F) : On if the module has failed (inoperative).

●

Green OK light : On if at least one of the axis groups is configured.

OK OK

_____________________________________________________________________

1.1-12 TSX SCM.... serial communication modules

●

Red fault light (F) : On if the module has failed (inoperative).

●

Green OK light : On if the module is operating correctly.

____________________________________________________________________

1.1-13 TSX MPT 104/MAP 1074/ETH 107 network modules

TELWAY TSX MPT 104 network module

●

Green RUN light : On if the module is operating correctly.

●

Red ADR light : On if there is an addressing fault.

●

Red NET light : On if there is a network fault or if the station is disconnected from the network.

RUN

ADR

NET

___________________________________________________________________________

1/9

_______________________________________________________________________________________

Network modules (continued)

MAPWAY TSX MAP 1074 and ETHWAY TSX ETH 107 modules

●

Green RUN light : On if the module is operating correctly.

●

Red fault light (DEF) : On if the module has failed.

●

Yellow INR, RX, TX lights : Indicate the operating status of the module in relation to the network, as follows :

INR : Station participating in the logical ring (not present on TSX ETH 107).

RX : Reception of data.

TX : Transmission of data.

RUN

DEF

INR

●

Two 7-segment LCDs and a luminous

dot give information concerning the operation of the module. They display in succession every 2 seconds :

The network number with a dot at the bottom right (Example : Network number 2).

The station number without the dot

(Example : Station 1A).

If a fault appears during the self-tests or during operation, the LCDs display the code number of the fault.

____________________________________________________________________

1.1-14 TSX PCM 27/37 operator dialogue modules

●

Green RUN light, Red CPU light, Red MEM light :

Indicate the status of the module.

These lights can be either on or off, in accordance with the operating phases of the module. Refer to manual TSX DM PCM E.

●

Red I/O light : On if the console is disconnected.

●

Pencil point RST pushbutton : Restarts the module.

RUN

CPU

MEM

I/0

___________________________________________________________________________

1/10

Start-up 1

_______________________________________________________________________________________

1.2 Initial power-up procedure

The correct operation of the TSX or PMX 47 40, TSX or PMX 67-40, TSX or PMX 87-40,

TSX or PMX 107-40 model 40 PLCs is permanently monitored by a series of self-tests.

The processor system software (SMART) is able to detect operating faults caused by :

● hardware (modules, memories),

● programs (system, application).

The self-tests are performed at each power-up and during normal operation. They are described in Divider E, Appendix 6.

The results of these self-tests are displayed by indicator lights on the front panels of :

●

The power supply module (OK, ON)

The processor module (RUN, CPU, MEM, I/O)

●

The rackmaster modules (RUN, I/O)

The intelligent modules (F, OK)

The TELWAY network module (RUN, ADR, NET)

The MAPWAY network module (RUN, DEF, INR and the LCDs).

These indicator lights should be used to systematically and progressively check the operation of each module during the initial power-up procedure.

This procedure is described in the following tables, which show the status of the indicator lights of the various modules concerned at each stage of the power-up procedure.

The status of the indicator lights is indicated as follows :

: light out

: light on

If the indicator lights do not operate as shown, refer to Section 2 of this Divider and to the specific manual for each module.

___________________________________________________________________________

1/11

_______________________________________________________________________________________

1.2-1 Basic PLC

Procedure Check the state of the following indicator lights

TSX SUP..

TSX or

TPMX P...

TSX LFS... or

TSX LES...

With power off, install the power supply modules (TSX SUP..) and processor modules (TSX or TPMX P...) and then power up.

RUN

CPU

MEM

I/0

Load the internal RAM memory or insert a memory cartridge containing at least the application configuration and execute the program (by a RUN command from the terminal).

RUN

CPU

MEM

I/0

Install the module TSX LFS 120/121 fiber optic adapter module if there is a fiber optic remote I/O extension, or

TSX LES 120 if there is an electrical remote I/O extension, and connect it to the processor.

RUN

CPU

MEM

I/0

___________________________________________________________________________

1/12

Start-up 1

_______________________________________________________________________________________

1.2-2 Local I/O extensions

Procedure Check the state of the following indicator lights

TSX SUP..

TSX LES 20

Install the power supply module (TSX

SUP..) and then power up.

With power off, install the TSX LES 20 local rackmaster module and its connection to the processor and then power up.

RUN

I/0

___________________________________________________________________________

1/13

_______________________________________________________________________________________

1.2-3 Remote I/O extensions

Procedure Check the state of the following indicator lights

TSX SUP..

TSX LFS... or

TSX LES 200

Install the power supply module (TSX

SUP..) and then power up.

With power off, install :

● either the TSX LFS 200 or 201 fiber optic rackmaster module and its connection to the FO adapter module in the basic PLC, for a fiber optic remote extension,

● or the TSX LES 200 electrical rackmaster module and its connection to electrical adapter module in the basic PLC, for an electrical remote extension.

Then power up.

RUN

I/0

___________________________________________________________________________

1/14

Start-up 1

_______________________________________________________________________________________

1.2-4 Discrete I/O modules (TSX DET.../DST) and analog modules

(TSX ADT../AST..)

Procedure Check the state of the following indicator lights

TSX SUP..

TSX P... or TSX LES/LFS..

TPMX P...

Install the first module.

Install its terminal block.

RUN

CPU

MEM

I/0

Following the same procedure, progressively install the other modules and their terminal blocks.

RUN

CPU

MEM

I/0

___________________________________________________________________________

1/15

_______________________________________________________________________________________

1.2-5 Serial communication modules (TSX SCM....),

Counting and positioning modules (TSX DTM.100),

Axis control modules (TSX AXM 172/182/292/492)

Procedure Check the state of the following indicator lights

TSX SUP..

TSX P...or

Module

TPMX P...

Install the module

Note : TSX AXM 292 and 492 modules should be inserted with power off

RUN

CPU

MEM

I/0

______________________________________________________________________

1.2-6 Analog modules (TSX AEM.../ASR...)

Counting and positioning modules (TSX CTM 100, DMR 1652 and TSX AXM 171)

Procedure Check the state of the following indicator lights

TSX SUP..

TSX P.. or Module

TPMX P...

Install the module (the

TSX ASR 200 module has no indicator light).

Install the terminal block.

RUN

CPU

MEM

I/0

Following the same procedure, install the other modules and terminal blocks.

RUN

OK OK

CPU

MEM

I/0

___________________________________________________________________________

1/16

Start-up 1

_______________________________________________________________________________________

1.2-7 TELWAY network module (TSX MPT 104)

Procedure Check the state of the following indicator lights

TSX SUP..

TSX P...or

MPT 104

TPMX P...

Install the first module with its terminal block wired to the network.

RUN

ADR

CPU

MEM

I/0

NET

Install the next module with its terminal block wired to the network.

RUN

CPU

MEM

I/0

RUN

ADR

NET

___________________________________________________________________________

1/17

_______________________________________________________________________________________

1.2-8 MAPWAY (TSX MAP 107 4) and ETHWAY (TSX ETH 107) network modules

Procedure Check the state of the following indicator lights

TSX SUP..

TSX P.. or MAP 1074

TPMX P...

ETH 107

Install the module with its terminal block wired to the network, then run the self-tests (tests 1 to 8 are indicated on the LCDs)

RUN

CPU

MEM

I/0

RUN

DEF

INR

End of self-tests (the LCDs display alternately the number of the network and the number of the station)

RUN

CPU

MEM

I/0

RUN

DEF

INR

___________________________________________________________________________

1/18

Start-up 1

_______________________________________________________________________________________

1.3 Discrete I/O connection check

. Purpose

The purpose of this check is to ensure that :

- The information from the sensors is effectively received by the input modules and transmitted to the processor.

- The commands from the processor are effectively received by the output modules and transmitted to the corresponding actuators.

Activated outputs can cause machine motion. During this check, the field power circuit must therefore be disconnected from all components controlled by the PLC :

- Remove the power fuses from the motor controls.

- Cut off the hydraulic and pneumatic power supplies.

- Then power up the PLC equipped with its discrete I/O modules.

. Simple input connection check

This simple check, for which no programming or data terminal is required, consists in activating each sensor and checking that the corresponding status light changes state on the front of the input module. If it does not, check the wiring and the correct operation of the sensor.

. I/O connection check using a terminal

A more complete connection check can be made by using the following terminals :

- TSX T407 terminal with the TSX TS4 31 adjustment cartridge, in the Adjust or

Diagnostic modes (see manual TSX D12006E),

- FTX 417/507 terminal under OS2 with X-TEL software workshop and PL7-3 software, in the Adjust or Data modes (see manual TXT DM PL7 3 V5E).

This check cannot be made unless :

- A user memory cartridge containing at least a software configuration by default and the exact I/O configuration has been installed.

- Or the above-mentioned configurations have been loaded into the internal RAM memory of the PLC.

. Checking the inputs

- Actuate each sensor and check that the corresponding input status light changes state.

- Check on the terminal that the corresponding input bit also changes state.

. Checking the outputs

- On the terminal, set each output bit to 1 and then to 0.

- Check that the corresponding output status light is turned on and off and that the corresponding actuator is turned on and off.

___________________________________________________________________________

1/19

_______________________________________________________________________________________

___________________________________________________________________________

1/20

________________________________________________________

Maintenance Section 2

___________________________________________________________________________

2.1

General

______________________________________________________________________________________

2.2

Troubleshooting using the indicator lights 2/3

2.2-3 Processor module and TSX LES 20

2/3

2/4

2/6

2/6 2.2-4 Processor module and remote fiber optic

(TSX LFS 200/201) or electrical (TSX LES 200)

2.2-5 Processor module and TSX DST ...

2.2-6 Processor module and discrete I/O modules

Page

2/2

2/7

2/8

___________________________________________________________________________

2/1

_______________________________________________________________________________________

2.1 General

Model 40 PLCs are specially designed for industrial environments and require no regular maintenance. In the event of a failure, any module can be quickly and easily replaced from the stock of spares. This section is therefore limited to a description of the failures that may occur, their probable causes and the remedial action to be taken.

Malfunctions of the PLCs can be caused by two types of failures :

●

External failures :

- Incorrect power supply voltage

- Defective sensors or actuators

- Abnormal environmental or service conditions (excessive temperatures, humidity, dust, etc).

●

Internal failures :

- Component failures.

Consequently, it is essential to carefully trace the cause of any failure to its point of origin, since this may be external to the PLC and must therefore be corrected before any modules are changed.

Under no circumstances should the user attempt to disassemble or repair a module. Unauthorized disassembly or repair may entail cancellation of the equipment guarantee.

___________________________________________________________________________

2/2

Maintenance 2

_______________________________________________________________________________________

2.2 Troubleshooting using the indicator lights

This section is limited to troubleshooting using the indicator lights of the following modules :

●

Power supply modules (TSX SUP ..),

Processor modules (TSX P.. and TPMX P..),

●

Local rackmaster modules (TSX LES 20),

Fiber optic (TSX LFS 200/201) or electrical (TSX LES 200) rackmaster modules,

Discrete I/O modules (TSX DET .../DST ...).

For the other modules (analog, counting and positioning, axis control, communication and network modules) refer to the specialized manual of the module concerned.

In the following troubleshooting charts, the significance of the indicator lights is as follows :

: indicator light out

: indicator light on

____________________________________________________________________

2.2-1 Power supply modules

Indicator lights

Probable cause

. No supply voltage

Remedial action

. Incorrect supply voltage

. Check the protection fuse.

. Check the connection to the terminal block.

. Check the supply voltage and if necessary correct it.

If the fault persists, change the power supply module.

. Overload or handling error

. Power down then power up again.

. Faulty component(s) in the rack or pair of racks supplied

. Locate the faulty component by removing all the modules and by the power supply module replacing them one by one until the fault reappears.

Then change the faulty module.

___________________________________________________________________________

2/3

_______________________________________________________________________________________

2.2-2 Processor module

Indicator lights

Probable cause

. PLC stopped

Remedial action

RUN

CPU

MEM

I/0

. Presence of a breakpoint in the user program.

. Connect the FTX 507 terminal and switch the

PLC to RUN.

. Connect the FTX 507 terminal, select the Debug mode and delete the breakpoint.

RUN

CPU

MEM

I/0

. Defective processor module.

. A defective element

(cable, rack, I/O module) is causing a permanent fault.

. Disconnection of fiber optic link

. Change the processor module.

. Find the defective element by proceeding as described above for the power supply module.

Then change the defective element.

see note on page 2/6

. Defective processor module.

. Change the processor module.

RUN

CPU

MEM

I/0

RUN

CPU

MEM

I/0

(1)

. Disconnected terminal block

. Fault in the I/O configuration

. Check that each terminal block is correctly plugged in.

. Connect the FTX 507 terminal, select the

Configuration mode and correct the I/O configuration.

. Change the I/O module.

. Defective I/O module

. Disconnection of fiber optic link see note on page 2/6

(1) PLCs in RUN or in STOP

___________________________________________________________________________

2/4

Maintenance 2

_______________________________________________________________________________________

Processor module (continued)

Indicator lights

Probable cause

Remedial action

. New configuration being loaded.

. Wait until loading is completed.

RUN

CPU

MEM

I/0

. Non-blocking software fault :

Master task period exceeded (watchdog triggered).

. Connect the FTX T507 terminal and make the necessary corrections.

. Alteration of the contents of the memory

. RAM memory cartridge initialize the contents of the memory and reload the program.

. EPROM memory cartridge erase the contents of the cartridge by using the UV eraser (TSX EPE 1 or 2), then reload the program by using the TSX TPE 020 1 cartridge programmer.

. Back-up battery on the RAM memory cartridge or the processor defective.

(On first power-up, leave the cartridge energized for 10 hours to ensure that the batteries are fully charged).

. Initialize the memory cartridge then reload the program.

. Memory cartridge not supported

(capacity too small or too large)

. Change the cartridge.

___________________________________________________________________________

2/5

_______________________________________________________________________________________

2.2-3 Processor module and TSX LES 20 local rackmaster module

Indicator lights

RUN

CPU

MEM

I/0

RUN

I/0

Probable cause

. Incorrect connection to the processor.

Remedial action

. Check for correct installation of the connecting cable and cable connector, correct addressing of the cable connector. If the fault persists, change the

TSX LES 20 local rackmaster module.

_______________________________________________________________________________________________

2.2-4 Processor module and remote fiber optic (TSX LFS 200/201) or electrical (TSX LES 200) rackmaster module.

Indicator lights

RUN

CPU

MEM

I/0

RUN

I/0

Probable cause

. Incorrect connection to the TSX LFS 120 or 121 fiber optic adapter module.

. Incorrect connection to the TSX LES 120 electrical adapter module.

Remedial action

. Check for correct installation of the connecting cable and cable connector, correct addressing of the module. If the fault persists, change the module.

Note : Disconnection of fiber optic link (see page 2/4)

Any disconnection or break in the fiber optic link will cause the device to malfunction.

. CPU, MEM and I/O indicator lights lit on processor :

- cause : RX disconnected on TSX LFS 120/121 or TSX LFS 200/201

- remedial action : reconnect and power up PLC again (reinitialize the application).

. CPU and I/O indicator lights lit on processor :

- cause : TX disconnected on TSX LFS 120/121 or RX disconnected on

TSX LFS 200/201

2/6

Maintenance 2

_______________________________________________________________________________________

2.2-5 Processor module and TSX DST... discrete output modules

Indicator lights

RUN

CPU

MEM

I/0

Probable cause

Remedial action

. Blown fuse (output . Remove the faulty output modules protected module (fault light F on).

by striker fuses).

. Locate and change the blown fuse (if blown, the striker projects).

. Note the number of the line concerned.

. Trace the line to find the cause of the short-circuit or overload and correct it.

. Reinstall the module.

. Triggering of the electronic protection device

(outputs with electronic protection)

. Modules with 1 fault light per point.

- Trace the line to find the cause of the court-circuit or overload and correct it.

- If the fault persists, change the module.

. Modules with 1 fault light.

(1) Without the terminal

- Unwire each point until the faulty line is found.

- Trace the line to find the cause of the short-circuit or overload and correct it.

- If the fault persists, change the module.

(2) With the terminal

- Force each output of the module to 1 and check the output voltage. If there is no voltage, the line is faulty.

- Trace the line to find the cause of the short-circuit or overload and correct it.

- If the fault persists, change the module.

___________________________________________________________________________

2/7

_______________________________________________________________________________________

2.2-6 Processor module and discrete I/O modules

(TSX DET.../DST...)

Indicator lights

Probable cause

. Terminal block disconnected

Remedial action

RUN

CPU

MEM

I/0

. Defective module

. Fault in the I/O configuration

. Check that each terminal block is correctly plugged in.

. (1) Without the terminal

- Locate the defective module by unplugging the modules one by one

Input modules :

- Change the defective module.

Output modules without fault lights

- Unwire each output point until the faulty line is found.

- Trace the line to find the cause of the short-circuit or overload and correct it.

- If the fault persists, change the module.

. (2) With the terminal

- Select the Data mode

- Read system bits SY40 to

SY47 to locate the pair of racks containing the faulty module.

- Then read the status bits of the modules to locate the faulty one and replace it.

. Select the Configuration mode

. Check the I/O configuration and make the necessary corrections.

___________________________________________________________________________

2/8

________________________________________________________

Service conditions Divider D

___________________________________________________________________________

Standards / Environmental reliability

1.1 Standards

1.2 Environment / normal service conditions

1.3 Reliability

1.4 Safety and system availability

Page

1/1

___________________________________________________________________________

D/1

________________________________________________________

Service conditions Divider D

___________________________________________________________________________

D/2

________________________________________________________

Standards/Environmental reliability Section 1

___________________________________________________________________________

1.1

Standards

Page

1/2

_______________________________________________________________________________________

1.2

Environment / normal service conditions 1/2

1.2-1 Climatic environment, vibrations 1/2

1/3

1/4

_______________________________________________________________________________________

1.3

Reliability 1/5

_______________________________________________________________________________________

1.4

Safety and system availability 1/6

___________________________________________________________________________

1/1

_______________________________________________________________________________________

1.1

Standards

The TSX 7 model 40 PLCs conform to all the principal national and international standards concerning industrial electronic control equipment.

- Specific standards for programmable controllers : functional characteristics, immunity, electrical strength, safety, etc.

NFC 63-850/IEC 65A(CO)22/CSA 22.2 no 142/NEMA ICS 3304/UL 508.

- Immunity to electrostatic discharge : IEC 801.2 level 4 (minimum 3).

- Isolation coordination : leakage line spacings in air : UL 508, NFC 20-040, IEC 664,

VDE 110 b, etc.

- Dielectric and flammable qualities of isolating materials : UL 746C, UL 94, etc.

- Transmission of electromagnetic disturbances : EN 55022, NFC 91022, FCC Part

15, VDE 871-877, etc.

- Marine classification authorities : BV, DNV, GL, LROS, RINA, etc.

Approvals have been obtained for Telemecanique's TSX 7 programmable controllers from numerous testing laboratories such as CSA, UL BV, etc.

____________________________________________________________________

1.2 Environment / normal service conditions

1.2-1 Climatic environment, vibrations and mechanical shocks

. Environment

TSX 47/67/87

A for operation 5°C to 55°C

A for storage -25°C to +70°C

A : temperature of adjacent air (see diagram), not to be confused with

R : ambient temperature outside the enclosure

30 % to 95 %

0 to 2000 m

. Vibrations

Constant

5 to 57 Hz

75 µ/m peak to peak

Acceleration

Constant

57 to 150 Hz peak

Tests according to IEC 68-2-6 Test FC.

. Mechanical shocks

Conforming to IEC 68-2-27 Test Ea. 1/2 sinus - 15 g /11 ms - 3 shocks/axes/direction.

___________________________________________________________________________

1/2

Standards/Environmental reliability 1

_______________________________________________________________________________________

1.2-2 Power supply voltages

Micro-cuts

(typical value) repetition

24 VDC 48 VDC 110-127 VAC 220-240 VAC

19,2 to 30 V 38,4 to 60 V 90 to 140 V 180 to 264 V

10 ms (1)

47 to 63 Hz

10 ms

47 to 63 Hz

10 ms

1 Hz max. 5 %

1 Hz max. 5 % -

1 Hz

10%

1 Hz

10%

_________

(1) With main power detector off.

____________________________________________________________________

1.2-3 Immunity

. Immunity to line noise

Line noise in common mode and serial mode

Peak value

Damped oscillating wave according to IEC 255-4

Power supply and interfaces < 24 V

1 KV serial mode

1 kV common mode

1 KV common mode mode série

Tests according to IEC 255-4.

Points of application : the signal is applied to the power supply wires and the inputs and outputs.

- Fast transitory electrical signal

___________________________________________________________________________________________

Direct coupling 2 KV common mode, serial mode

Clip coupling 1 KV

Interface < 24 V and modules Clip coupling 250 V

___________________________________________________________________________________________

Tests according to IEC 801-4 - level 3.

___________________________________________________________________________

1/3

_______________________________________________________________________________________

. Immunity to noise fields

Radiated noise

___________________________________________________________________________________________

- Value 10 V/m*

5 MHz to 1 GHz

1 KHz at 80 %

* Field radiated by a 1 W transmitter at 20 cm

Tests according to IEC 801-3.

. Resistance to electrostatic discharge

___________________________________________________________________________________________

Discharge by contact on the metal parts

6 KV

8 KV

Test according to IEC 801-2, level 3.

_____________________________________________________________________

1.2-4 Electrical strength

. No deterioration by the application of an electric shock voltage

___________________________________________________________________________________________

1.2/50 µs standard wave (IEC publication 60)

5 KV

3 positive shocks, 3 negative shocks

0.2 Hz

500 ý (0.5 joules)

With the PLC disconnected from the power supply, this voltage is applied to the power supply terminals, or between each power supply terminal and ground, and in common mode to each

. Dielectric strength

Test values

Points of application

2Vn + 1000 ie 1500 V (*)

45 to 65 Hz

The voltage is applied between each electrically independent circuit and all the others connected to the ground, and

No arcing or flashover.

Tests according to IEC 950.

_________

(*) Value for use at 220 VAC, for additional information, refer to the characteristics of each module.

___________________________________________________________________________

1/4

Standards/Environmental reliability 1

_______________________________________________________________________________________

1.3 Reliability

The TSX 7 model 40 PLCs have been designed and built by Telemecanique, using state of the art technology to achieve the highest standards of safety, reliability and maintainability for their products.

. Reliability

The reliability of a device is its ability to accomplish its required function in defined conditions during a given time. Irrespective of the manufacturer and the number of precautions that are taken, the failure rate is never zero. A certain number of failures must therefore be expected during the life of a PLC. Consequently, the necessary precautions should always be designed into an application so as to limit the consequences of any failure, particularly where safety is concerned.

. Built-in self-tests

The TSX 7 PLCs are provided with a series of built-in self-tests capable of detecting the majority of internal failures and operator errors that may occur during start-up, operation and maintenance of an automated system. These tests are performed at power-up, or during one or more scan cycles, and mainly concern :

• The processor : monitoring of the microprogram, the internal RAM memories (parity calculation) and the watchdog.

• The user memory cartridge : check for presence, type and contents (checksum).

• The inputs and outputs : check for presence of I/O, absence of short-circuits on outputs and monitoring of data exchange on the I/O bus.

The results of these self-tests are indicated by LEDs on the front of the PLC and may be further investigated by connecting the programming terminal. The PLCs are also equipped with an alarm relay contact which opens in case of a malfunction and to which an alarm system can be connected, since the action to be taken will usually involve stopping the automated system.

. Diagnostic aids

However, it should be noted that the majority of stoppages of an automated system (90 to 95 % of the total) are caused by failures external to the PLC (sensors, actuators, mechanical parts, etc.). It is therefore recommended that the user take advantage of the powerful diagnostic aids of the TSX 7 model 40 PLCs to detect and locate such faults.

___________________________________________________________________________

1/5

_______________________________________________________________________________________

1.4 Safety and system availability

. Safety

The operational safety of a device is its ability to avoid failures and to minimize their effects when they occur.

A system is said to be totally safe if the occurrence of failures can never lead to a dangerous situation.

An internal fault in a control system can be classified as belonging to one of two types :

• Passive if the fault results in an open circuit (no signal sent to output devices);

• Active if the fault results in a closed output circuit (signal sent to output devices).

Whether or not a given type of fault can be considered dangerous will depend on the function of the output concerned. A passive fault is dangerous if the normal function is to operate an alarm. An active fault is dangerous if it maintains and undesired signal.

It is important to appreciate the fundamental difference in behavior between an electromechanical relay and an electronic component (such as a relay for example) :

• There is a high probability (9 times out of 10) that a fault in a relay will produce an open circuit (control circuit not powered).

• But there is an even probability (5 times out of 10) that a fault in a transistor will produce an open circuit, it is just as likely to produce a closed circuit.

For this reason, it is important to correctly determine the nature and consequences of possible faults when designing an automated system controlled by an electronic device such as a PLC (even when the PLC uses relay output modules).

The system designer should provide protection against any internal faults in the PLC which may not be indicated or which may be dangerous for the application, by incorporating external protective devices. These devices may use several different technologies such as mechanical, electromechanical, pneumatic or hydraulic (for example : wiring an over-run detector and emergency stop button to the coil of a motion control contactor).

To protect the system against dangerous faults which may occur in output circuits and actuators, it is recommended to re-wire each critical output device to an input so that the latter can be used to check that all output commands are effectively executed.

___________________________________________________________________________

1/6

Standards/Environmental reliability 1

_______________________________________________________________________________________

. System availability

The availability of a system is its ability to accomplish a required function at any given moment and during any given period, and includes considerations of reliability, maintainability and maintenance policy.

System availability is therefore specific to each application, since it depends on :

• The architecture of the automated system

• The reliability and maintainability of the hardware used (PLCs, sensors, actuators, machines, etc)

• The user's maintenance policy and logistic back-up (software structure, failure indication and warning systems, availability of spare parts, training of maintenance personnel, etc).

___________________________________________________________________________

1/7

_______________________________________________________________________________________

___________________________________________________________________________

1/8

________________________________________________________

Appendices Divider E

___________________________________________________________________________

Page

Current consumption tables

Simplified discrete I/O diagrams

A1/1

A1.1 Definition of typical and maximum consumption

A1.2 Power supply modules

A1.3 TSX and TPMX P.. processor modules

A1.4 Modules for I/O extensions

A1.5 User memory cartridges

A1.6 Discrete I/O interface modules

A1.7 Analog interfaces and intelligent modules

A1.8 Counting and positioning interface modules

A1.9 Communication and operator dialogue modules

A1.10 Network modules

______________________________________________________________________________________

A2/1

A2.1 Simplified diagrams of input circuits

A2.2 Simplified diagrams of output circuits

______________________________________________________________________________________

Connections to TSX BLK 2/BLK 3 terminal blocks A3/1

A3/1

A3.1 Connections to 4-point modules

A3.2 Connections to 8-point modules

______________________________________________________________________________________

Discrete I/O - Connection of 3-wire detectors A4/1

A4/1

A4.1 PNP type 3-wire detectors to 16-input modules

A4.2 PNP type 3-wire detectors to 8-input modules

A4.3 NPN type 3-wire detectors to 8-input modules

___________________________________________________________________________

E/1

________________________________________________________

Appendices Divider E

___________________________________________________________________________

Calculation of optical consumption

Page

A5/1

A5.1 Basis of calculation

A5.2 Procedure

______________________________________________________________________________________

Description of processor self-tests A6/1

A6/1

A6.1 Presentation

A6.2 Self-tests on a power return

A6.3 Self-tests in normal operation

___________________________________________________________________________

E/2

________________________________________________________

Current consumption tables Appendix 1

___________________________________________________________________________

A1.1

Definition of typical and maximum consumption

Page

A1/2

____________________________________________________________________________________

A1.2

Power supply modules A1/2

_______________________________________________________________________________________

A1.3

TSX and TPMX P.. processor modules A1/3

______________________________________________________________________________________

A1.4

Modules for I/O extensions A1/4

______________________________________________________________________________________

A1.5

User memory cartridges A1/5

______________________________________________________________________________________

A1.6

Discrete I/O interface modules A1/5

______________________________________________________________________________________

A1.7

Analog interfaces and intelligent modules A1/7

______________________________________________________________________________________

A1.8

Counting and positioning interface modules A1/7

______________________________________________________________________________________

A1.9

Communication and operator dialogue modules A1/8

______________________________________________________________________________________

A1/9

___________________________________________________________________________

A1/1

_______________________________________________________________________________________

Typical consumption : Average module consumption at an operating temperature

= 25° C.

Maximum consumption : Consumption calculated for module use over the whole temperature operating range

= 5° C to 55° C.

: temperature of the surrounding air.

________________________________________________________________________________________

A1.2 Power supply modules

_______________________________________________________________________________________

References

TSX SUP 40

TSX SUP 41

TSX SUP 42

TSX SUP 61

+5V

1.5 A

7 A

TSX SUP 62 7 A

TSX SUP 702 (3) 9 A (11A)

Maximum current available

+12VL (1) +12VP (1)

3.3 A

1.5A (2A)

3.3 A

4 A

3.5 A (4A)

-12V

0.1 A

Maximum power (2)

40 W

65 W

65 W (85W)

_________

(1) On TSX SUP 40/41/42/61/62 modules the + 12 VL and + 12 VP outputs are the same.

(2) Since the +5V, +12VL, +12VP, -12V outputs cannot deliver their maximum current simultaneously, the maximum power available must be taken into account when calculating the current consumption.

(3) The first value is for a power supply module installed in a non fan-cooled rack, the second value in brackets is for a power supply module installed in a fan-cooled rack.

___________________________________________________________________________

A1/2

Current consumption tables A1

_______________________________________________________________________________________

Version V5 processors

TSX P47 405

TSX P47 415 (2)

TSX P47 425

TSX P47 455

TSX P67 425

TSX P67 455

TSX P87 425

TSX P87 455

TSX P107 425

TSX P107 455

TPMX P47 425

TPMX P47 455

TPMX P67 425

TPMX P67 455

TPMX P87 425

TPMX P87 455

TPMX P107 425

References

+5V

580/ 980

Consumption per module (mA)

(Typical/ maximum)

+12VL +12VP

80/ 100 (1)

1250/ 1850

950/ 1550

80/

100

(1)

1250/ 1850

1000/ 1600

1300/ 19000

1050 / 1650

80/

100

(1)

1350/ 1950

1550 / 2350

1650 / 2450

1330/ 1930

1730/ 2310

1300/ 1900

1600/ 2200

1350 / 1950

1650/ 2250

1550 / 2350

1650 / 2450

80/

100

(1)

-12V

TPMX P107 455

_________

(1) 700/ 1000 mA when a TSX T407 terminal is connected to the processor

(2) If an intelligent module is used, calculate the current consumption. If the calculated consumption exceeds the power supply capacity, use a TSX SUP 702 or TSX SUP 61/62 as appropriate for the supply voltage.

___________________________________________________________________________

A1/3

_______________________________________________________________________________________

Version V4 processors

References

TSX P47 400

TSX P47 410 (2)

TSX P47 411 (2)

TSX P47 420

TSX P67 410

TSX P67 420

TSX P87 410

TSX P87 420

TSX P107 410

TSX P107 420

TPMX P47 420

TPMX P67 420

TPMX P87 420

TPMX P107 420

+5V

580/ 980

Consumption per module (mA)

(Typical/ maximum)

+12VL +12VP

80/ 100 (1)

720/ 1220

920/ 1620

80/

100

(1)

920/ 1620

720/ 1220

920/ 1620

800/ 1300

80/

100

(1)

1000/ 1600

1100 / 1800

1300/ 2100

920/ 1620

1000/ 1600

1300/ 2100

80/

100

(1)

-12V

________________________________________________________________________________________

References

TSX LES 20

TSX LES 120

TSX LES 200

TSX LFS 120/121

TSX LFS 200/201

+5V

400/ 400

340/ 400

Consumption per module (mA)

(Typical/ maximum)

+12VL +12VP

110/

15/

110

430/ 500

260/ 400

350/ 500

80/

15/

80/

120

120 -

-12V

_________

(1) 700/ 1000 mA when a TSX T407 terminal is connected to the processor

___________________________________________________________________________

A1/4

Current consumption tables A1

_______________________________________________________________________________________

References

TSX RAM 32 16

TSX RAM 64 16

TSX RAM 128 16

TSX RAM 256 16

TSX RPM 32 16

TSX RPM 64 16

TSX RPM 128 16

TSX RPM 256 16

+5V

30/ 60

30/ 50

30/ 60

30/ 50

10/ 20

15/ 30

Consumption per module (mA)

(Typical/ maximum)

+12VL +12VP

-12V

________________________________________________________________________________________

Discrete input interface modules

References

TSX DET 4 66

TSX DET 8 02

TSX DET 8 03

TSX DET 8 05

TSX DET 8 12

TSX DET 8 13

TSX DET 8 14

TSX DET 8 24

TSX DET 16 03

TSX DET 16 04

TSX DET 16 12

TSX DET 16 13

TSX DET 32 32

TSX DET 32 42

TSX DET 32 52 -

+5V

Consumption per module (mA)

(Typical/ maximum)

+12VL +12VP

10 / 10 -

13/ 13

13 / 13

14/ 14

11/ 11

13/ 13

35/ 35

14/ 14

35/ 45

11/ 11

-12V

___________________________________________________________________________

A1/5

_______________________________________________________________________________________

Discrete output interface modules

References

TSX DST 4 17

TSX DST 8 04

TSX DST 8 05

TSX DST 8 17

TSX DST 8 35

TSX DST 8 82

TSX DST 16 04

TSX DST 16 12

TSX DST 16 32

TSX DST 16 33

TSX DST 16 34

TSX DST 16 35

TSX DST 16 82

TSX DST 24 72

TSX DST 24 82

TSX DST 32 92

+5V

Consumption per module (mA) (+12VL)

Consumption per channel at 1 (mA) (+12VP)

(Typical/ maximum)

+12VL +12VP

30/ 30 10/ 10

24/ 24

24/

10/

8/ 8

50/

20/ 20

25/ 25

30/ 30

25/ 25

28/ 28

50/ 50

43/ 43

60+5/ 60 +5 (1)

60/ 60 (2)

10/

17/

38/

5 (2)

-12V

________

(1) 60 mA per module + 5 mA per channel at 1 for + 12 VL

(2) TSX DST 32 92 consumption with interchangeability index II • 04.

If II < 04, consumption is for 12 VL : 60 mA per module + 5 mA per channel at 1

for 12 VP : 0

___________________________________________________________________________

A1/6

Current consumption tables A1

_______________________________________________________________________________________

References

TSX ADT 201

TSX ADT 202

TSX ADT 203

TSX AEM 411

TSX AEM 412

TSX AEM 413

TSX AEM 811

TSX AEM 821

TSX AEM 1601

TSX AEM 1602

TSX AEM 1613

TSX AEM 1212

TSX AST 200

TSX ASR 200

TSX ASR 401

TSX ASR 402

TSX ASR 403

TSX ASR 800

________

350/ 400

250/ 280

520/ 650

500/ 650

+5V

400/ 400

Consumption per module (mA)

(Typical/ maximum)

+12VL +12VP

20/ 20

200/

300

20/

16/

200/

80/

300

130

130/ 230

235/ 250

250/ 250

235/ 250

200/ 250

12/

11/

12/

20/

12/

180/

330/

300/

400/

560/

650/

510/

190

420

300

400 (1)

650 (1)

580

(1) With outputs at maximum current.

_____________________________________________________________________

-12V

References

TSX AXT 200

TSX CTM 100

TSX DTM 100

TSX DMR 16 52

TSX AXM 171

TSX AXM 171 1

TSX AXM 172

TSX AXM 162/182

TSX AXM 292

+5V

330/ 380

Consumption per module (mA)

(Typical/ maximum)

+12VL +12VP

25/ 25 -

350/ 400

450/ 500

25/

20/

100/

60/

150

340/ 350

350/ 400

400/ 460

400/ 500

1400/ 2600

12/

15/

25/

20/

12/

130/

100/

200/

19/

150

100

200

-12V

A1/7

_______________________________________________________________________________________

References

TSX SCM 20 11

TSX SCM 20 12

TSX SCM 20 13

TSX SCM 20 14

TSX SCM 20 22

TSX SCM 20 44

TSX SCM 20 55

TSX SCM 21 11

TSX SCM 21 12

TSX SCM 21 13

TSX SCM 21 14

TSX SCM 21 16

TSX SCM 21 22

TSX SCM 21 26

TSX SCM 21 46

TSX SCM 22 11

TSX SCM 22 12

TSX SCM 22 13

TSX SCM 22 14

TSX SCM 22 22

TSX SCM 22 44

TSX PCM 27/37

TSX BMP 010

TPMX KB1

445/ 720

475/ 750

440/ 770

480/ 810

450/ 780

405/ 680

415/ 700

+5V

475/ 750

440/ 770

Consumption per module (mA)

(Typical/ maximum)

+12VL +12VP

12/

250/

215/

440

380

480/ 810

450/ 780

405/ 680

425/ 700

45/

12/

150/

250/

200/

300/

230

420

320

440

12/

45/

12/

150/ 240

250/ 440

215/ 380

150/ 230

250/ 420

250/ 440

200/ 320

215/ 380

425/ 700

475/ 750

440/7 70

480/ 810

450/ 780

405/ 680

425/ 700

1350/ 1750

270/ 300 (1)

70/ 100 -

12/ 20

45/ 55

12/ 20

10/ 10

250/ 440

215/ 380

150/ 230

250/ 420

200/ 320

300/ 440

________

(1) If a TPMX KB1 keyboard is used, make allowance for its consumption as well.

35/ 35

-12V

35/ 35

20/ 20

___________________________________________________________________________

A1/8

Current consumption tables A1

_______________________________________________________________________________________

References

TSX MPT 104

TSX MAP 107 4

TSX ETH 107

+5V

300/ 300

Consumption per module (mA)

(Typical/ maximum)

+12VL +12VP

20/ 20 70/ 70

1300/ 1600

2300/ 2000 -

500/ 500

-12V

___________________________________________________________________________

A1/9

_______________________________________________________________________________________

___________________________________________________________________________

A1/10

________________________________________________________

Simplified discrete Appendix 2

A2.1

Simplified diagrams of input circuits

Page

A2/2

______________________________________________________________________________________

A2.2

Simplified diagrams of output circuits A2/5

___________________________________________________________________________

A2/1

_______________________________________________________________________________________

Definition of symbols

R1 or Z1

Input matching

: Current threshold

: Status lamp

: Line fault display

: Optical coupler

: Rectification and clipping

: Clipping and protection against inversion

Voltage threshold

Line monitoring

Sensor status check

TSX DET 8 02 input module

BUS

TSX DET 8 03 and TSX DET 8 24 input modules

TSX DET 8 05 input module

BUS

___________________________________________________________________________

A2/2

Simplified discrete I/O diagrams A2

_______________________________________________________________________________________

TSX DET 16 04 input module

BUS

TSX DET 8 12 and TSX DET 8 13 input modules

R2 D2

BUS

TSX DET 16 12 and TSX DET 16 13 input modules

R2 D2

BUS

___________________________________________________________________________

A2/3

_______________________________________________________________________________________

TSX DET 4 66 input module

+AL

E(n)

BUS

___________________________________________________________________________

A2/4

Simplified discrete I/O diagrams A2

_______________________________________________________________________________________

Definition of symbols

D3-D4

: Status display (1 per channel)

: Fault light (1 per module or 1 per channel for the TSX DST 4 17 module)

: Optical coupler

: Optical triac

: Protective diode against voltage inversions

: Discharge diode for inductive load

: Discharge diode for inductive load (D4 only in the case of the

TSX DST 8 82 module)

RC and GE : Peak limiters fu : Fuse

TSX DST 8 04 output module

BUS

TSX DST 8 05 output module

BUS zéro

BUS

___________________________________________________________________________

A2/5

_______________________________________________________________________________________

TSX DST 16 04 output module

BUS

TSX DST 8 35 output module

BUS

"O"

"F"

BUS

TSX DST 16 32/16 34/16 35 output module

BUS

___________________________________________________________________________

A2/6

Simplified discrete I/O diagrams A2

_______________________________________________________________________________________

TSX DST 16 12 output module

BUS

Commande

D1 Ge

–

TSX DST 4 17 and 8 17 output modules

BUS

Protection

Commande

D1 Ge

BUS O1

TSX DST 16 33 output module

BUS

___________________________________________________________________________

A2/7

_______________________________________________________________________________________

TSX DST 8 82/16 82 output modules

Protection

D1 Ge

+

BUS

Commande

–

L2 O1

BUS

TSX DST 24 72/24 82 output modules

Commande

BUS

Autres voies du module

___________________________________________________________________________

A2/8

Simplified discrete I/O diagrams A2

_______________________________________________________________________________________

TSX DST 32 92 output module

Amplifi-

Power puissance

BUS

Autres voies du module

___________________________________________________________________________

A2/9

_______________________________________________________________________________________

___________________________________________________________________________

A2/10

________________________________________________________

Connections to Appendix 3

A3.1

Connections to 4-point modules

Page

A3/1

______________________________________________________________________________________

A3.2

Connections to 8-point modules A3/2

___________________________________________________________________________

A3/1

_______________________________________________________________________________________

I/O modules with TSX BLK 2 terminal blocks

2 wires per point

+ –

TSX BLK 2

AI AI

0 0

2 4

3 6

1 2

TSX DET 4 66

2 wires per point

+ –

TSX BLK 2

AI AI

0 0

2 4

3 6

1 2

TSX DST 4 17

___________________________________________________________________________

A3/2

Connections to TSX BLK 2/BLK 3 terminal blocks A3

_______________________________________________________________________________________

I/O modules with TSX BLK 2/BLK 3 terminal blocks

Commons in the terminal block 2 wires per point

– +

TSX BLK 2

AI AI

0 0

2 4

3 6

1 2

TSX DET 8 12 / 8 13

TSX DET 8 02 / 8 03 / 8 05

TSX DET 8 14/8 24

+ –

TSX BLK 3

AI AI

0 0

V 0

V 1

1 2

V 2

2 4

V 5

3 6

V 6

TSX DET 8 12 / 8 13

TSX DET 8 02 / 8 03 / 8 05

TSX DET 8 14/8 24

___________________________________________________________________________

A3/3

_______________________________________________________________________________________

Relay and AC output modules with TSX BLK 2/BLK 3 terminal blocks

2 wires per point Commons in the terminal block

2 4

3 6

1 2

TSX BLK 2

AI AI

0 0

1 V

TSX DST 8 04 / 8 05

TSX DST 8 35

TSX BLK 3

AI AI

0 0

V 0

V 1

1 2

V 2

2 4

V 5

3 6

V 6

TSX DST 8 04 / 8 05

TSX DST 8 35

___________________________________________________________________________

A3/4

Connections to TSX BLK 2/BLK 3 terminal blocks A3

_______________________________________________________________________________________

DC output modules with TSX BLK 2 / BLK 3 terminal blocks

2 wires per point

+ –

TSX DST 8 17

TSX BLK 2

AI AI

0 0

2 4

3 6

1 2

Commons in the terminal block

– +

TSX BLK 3

AI AI

0 0

TSX DST 8 17

1 2

2 4

3 6

___________________________________________________________________________

A3/5

_______________________________________________________________________________________

___________________________________________________________________________

A3/6

________________________________________________________

Discrete I/O Appendix 4

A4.1

PNP type 3-wire detectors to 16-input modules

Page

A4/2

______________________________________________________________________________________

A4.2

PNP type 3-wire detectors to 8-input modules A4/3

A4/3

A4/4

______________________________________________________________________________________

A4.3

NPN type 3-wire detectors to 8-input modules A4/5

A4/5

A4/6

___________________________________________________________________________

A4/1

_______________________________________________________________________________________

Type of 3-wire detector (*) : PNP

Type of input module : 16 DC inputs

Type of terminal block : BLK 1 (with external commons)

For reasons of space, the diagram does not show detectors connected to all the inputs. The inputs not shown are connected in the same way.

+ –

– Bu (Bleu) 10

Bk (Noir)

Bn (Brun)

– Bu (Bleu) 12

Bk (Noir)

Bn (Brun)

– Bu (Bleu) 14

Bk (Noir)

Bn (Brun)

– Bu (Bleu)

Bk (Noir)

Bn (Brun)

– Bu (Bleu) 18

Bk (Noir)

Bn (Brun)

– Bu (Bleu) IA

Bk (Noir)

Bn (Brun)

– Bu (Bleu) IC

Bk (Noir)

Bn (Brun)

– Bu (Bleu)

Bk (Noir)

Bn (Brun)

TSX BLK 1

AI AI AI

0 0 0

AI 2

1 3

AI AI AI

1 2 4

AI 6

3 7

AI AI AI

2 4 8

AI A

5 B

AI AI AI

3 6 C

AI E

7 F

Nominal value of I0, I1, .........., IF with TSX DET 16 12 : 16.5 mA with TSX DET 16 13 : 10.5 mA

_________

(*) Conforming to Cenelec standard EN 50008/25/26.

___________________________________________________________________________

A4/2

Discrete I/O - Connection of 3-wire detectors A4

_______________________________________________________________________________________

A4.2-1 With external commons

Type of 3-wire detector (*) : PNP

Type of input module : 8 DC inputs

Type of terminal block : BLK 1 (with external commons)

+ –

– Bu (Bleu)

Bk (Noir)

Bn (Brun)

– Bu (Bleu)

Bk (Noir)

Bn (Brun)

– Bu (Bleu)

Bk (Noir)

Bn (Brun)

– Bu (Bleu)

Bk (Noir)

Bn (Brun)

– Bu (Bleu)

Bk (Noir)

Bn (Brun)

– Bu (Bleu)

Bk (Noir)

Bn (Brun)

– Bu (Bleu)

Bk (Noir)

Bn (Brun)

– Bu (Bleu)

Bk (Noir)

Bn (Brun)

TSX BLK 1

AI AI AI

0 0 0

AI 2

1 3

AI AI AI

1 2 4

AI 6

3 7

AI AI AI

2 4 8

AI A

5 B

AI AI AI

3 6 C

AI E

7 F

Nominal value of I0, I1,......., I7 with TSX DET 8 12 : 16.5 mA with TSX DET 8 13 : 10.5 mA

_________

(*) Conforming to Cenelec standard EN 50008/25/26.

___________________________________________________________________________

A4/3

_______________________________________________________________________________________

A4.2-2 With independent channels

Type of 3-wire detector (*) : PNP

Type of input module

Type of terminal block :

: 8 DC inputs

BLK 1 (independent channels)

+ –

– Bu (Bleu)

Bk (Noir)

Bn (Brun)

– Bu (Bleu)

Bk (Noir)

Bn (Brun)

– Bu (Bleu)

Bk (Noir)

Bn (Brun)

– Bu (Bleu)

Bk (Noir)

Bn (Brun)

– Bu (Bleu)

Bk (Noir)

Bn (Brun)

– Bu (Bleu)

Bk (Noir)

Bn (Brun)

– Bu (Bleu)

Bk (Noir)

Bn (Brun)

– Bu (Bleu)

Bk (Noir)

Bn (Brun)

TSX BLK 1

AI AI AI

0 0 0

AI 2

1 3

AI AI AI

1 2 4

AI 6

3 7

AI AI AI

2 4 8

AI A

5 B

AI AI AI

3 6 C

AI E

7 F

Nominal value of I0, I1,......., I7 with TSX DET 8 12 : 16.5 mA with TSX DET 8 13 : 10.5 mA

_________

(*) Conforming to Cenelec standard EN 50008/25/26.

___________________________________________________________________________

A4/4

Discrete I/O - Connection of 3-wire detectors A4

_______________________________________________________________________________________

A4.3-1 With external commons

Type of 3-wire detector (*) : NPN

Type of input module : 8 DC inputs

Type of terminal block : BLK 1 (with external commons)

This type of connection is only possible with 8-point modules.

+ –

– Bu (Bleu)

Bk (Noir)

+ Bn (Brun) 10

– Bu (Bleu)

Bk (Noir)

+ Bn (Brun) 11

– Bu (Bleu)

Bk (Noir)

+ Bn (Brun) 12

– Bu (Bleu)

Bk (Noir)

+ Bn (Brun)

– Bu (Bleu)

Bk (Noir)

+ Bn (Brun)

– Bu (Bleu)

Bk (Noir)

+ Bn (Brun)

– Bu (Bleu)

Bk (Noir)

+ Bn (Brun)

– Bu (Bleu)

Bk (Noir)

+ Bn (Brun) 17

TSX BLK 1

AI AI AI

0 0 0

AI 2

1 3

AI AI AI

1 2 4

AI 6

3 7

AI AI AI

2 4 8

AI A

5 B

AI AI AI

3 6 C

AI E

7 F

Nominal value of I0, I1,......., I7 with TSX DET 8 12 : 16.5 mA with TSX DET 8 13 : 10.5 mA

_________

(*) Conforming to Cenelec standard EN 50008/25/26.

___________________________________________________________________________

A4/5

_______________________________________________________________________________________

A4.3-2 With independent channels

Type of 3-wire detector (*) : NPN

Type of input module

Type of terminal block :

: 8 DC inputs

BLK 1 (independent channels)

This type of connection is only possible with 8-point modules.

+ –

– Bu (Bleu)

Bk (Noir)

+ Bn (Brun) 10

– Bu (Bleu)

Bk (Noir)

+ Bn (Brun) 11

– Bu (Bleu)

Bk (Noir)

+ Bn (Brun) 12

– Bu (Bleu)

Bk (Noir)

+ Bn (Brun) 13

– Bu (Bleu)

Bk (Noir)

+ Bn (Brun) 14

– Bu (Bleu)

Bk (Noir)

+ Bn (Brun) 15

– Bu (Bleu)

Bk (Noir)

+ Bn (Brun) 16

– Bu (Bleu)

Bk (Noir)

+ Bn (Brun) 17

TSX BLK 1

AI AI AI

0 0 0

AI 2

1 3

AI AI AI

1 2 4

AI 6

3 7

AI AI AI

2 4 8

AI A

5 B

AI AI AI

3 6 C

AI E

7 F

Nominal value of I0, I1,......., I7 with TSX DET 8 12 : 16.5 mA with TSX DET 8 13 : 10.5 mA

_________

(*) Conforming to Cenelec standard EN 50008/25/26.

___________________________________________________________________________

A4/6

________________________________________________________

Calculation of optical consumption Appendix 5

___________________________________________________________________________

A5.1

Basis of calculation

Page

A5/2

_______________________________________________________________________________________

A5.2

Procedure A5/2

___________________________________________________________________________

A5/1

_______________________________________________________________________________________

If the PLC configuration includes a remote I/O extension, the optical consumption must be calculated, in order to verify that the attenuation caused by the fiber optic cable, with its connectors and splices, is not excessive.

The following elements have to be taken into account :

Loss due to splices : 0.1 dBm minimum/0.25 dBm maximum per splice

Dispersion in the connectors of the TSX CBD ... cables :

1 dBm minimum/- 1.5 dBm maximum

Loss due to user FO cable : - x . L x = attenuation in dBm/km (value given by the manufacturer)

L = length of the cable in kilometers

Transmitter output power available at the end of a TSX CBD 050 cable : typically -13 dBm at 25°C and -14 dBm assured from 0 to 60°C.

Example :

At 25°C the optical power available at the end of an FO cable 0.4 km long, with attenuation of 5 dBm/km, connected to the TSX CBD ... cable by 2 splices, must be greater than -17 dBm composed as follows :

• -13 dBm : transmitter output power

• -1.5 dBm : connectors

• -0.5 dBm : 2 splices

• -2 dBm : attenuation of the cable

____________________________________________________________________

The optical power available can easily be checked by means of a reference light source, an optical wattmeter and a TSX CBD 050 cable, by proceeding as follows :

Tx Rx

The light source is regulated so that the power received is P1 = - 13 dBm.

___________________________________________________________________________

A5/2

Calculation of optical consumption A5

_______________________________________________________________________________________

Connect the light source, regulated as above, to the Tx side of the TSX CBD ... half cable and the same wattmeter to the Rx side of the TSX CBD .... half cable. The power measured P2 must be more than the attenuation (-17 dBm in the example above).

If it is not, it is necessary to check the state of the splices, the attenuation of the cable or for the presence of a cut fiber. These checks require the use of an optical reflectometer.

Between 0 and 60°C the attenuation may increase by -1 dBm.

1 2 2 1

_________

TSX CBD ... cable

splices

Repairs

If necessary, repairs can be made to the fiber optic cables by means of splices. It is then essential to check that the attenuation caused by each splice is less than -0.2 dBm.

___________________________________________________________________________

A5/3

_______________________________________________________________________________________

___________________________________________________________________________

A5/4

________________________________________________________

Description of processor Appendix 6

A6.1

Presentation

Page

A6/2

_______________________________________________________________________________________

A6.2

Self-tests on a power return A6/2

A6/2

A6/3

______________________________________________________________________________________

A6.3

Self-tests in normal operation A6/4

A6/4

A6/5

A6/6

___________________________________________________________________________

A6/1

_______________________________________________________________________________________

The operating software in the processors (SMART) performs self-tests : on a power return

- Warm restart

- Cold restart.

during normal operation.

This appendix briefly describes the various self-tests and gives the state of the processor indicator lamps when a fault is detected.

If one of the self-tests fails, the processor stops and a code is displayed on the processor indicator lamps.

In the following pages, the states of the indicator lamps are represented as follows :

Off

Blinking

Any state (off, on or blinking)

____________________________________________________________________

A6.2-1 Self-tests on a warm restart

State of lamps if a fault is encountered

RUN CPU MEM I/O

Self-tests

Test of the EPROM system memory

Tests of the TURBO RAM memories

Test of the RAM system memory

Test of the status and operation of the parity check

___________________________________________________________________________

A6/2

Description of processor self-tests A6

_______________________________________________________________________________________

A6.2-2 Self-tests on a cold restart

State of lamps if a fault is encountered

RUN CPU MEM I/

Self-tests

Tests of the pre-processing processor

Tests of the RAM memories

RAM system memory

Application RAM internal memory

Tests of the bit memory

Tests of the Boolean processor

Tests of the interruption system

Note :

On a hot or cold restart, if one of the self-tests fails, no communication is possible with the terminal.

___________________________________________________________________________

A6/3

_______________________________________________________________________________________

When the processor has not detected any faults during power-up, the application program can be run.

From then on, a series of self-tests is continuously performed during normal operation.

The faults detected by these various tests can be classified in order of importance and of their effect on the state of the PLC :

Serious faults

Blocking faults

Non-blocking faults.

____________________________________________________________________

A6.3-1 Serious faults

When these faults occur, the execution of the program can no longer be assured without at least a general reinitialization. They cause a stoppage of the CPU which requires a cold restart. The type of fault is recorded in system word SW60 (which can be read after the cold restart).

State of lamps if a fault is encountered

RUN CPU MEM I/O

Self-tests

Content of system word

SW60 after a fault

Check on the cycle of the pre-processing processor

Check on the checksum of the TURBO RAM

Check on the cycle of the numerical processor

Memory parity checks of the numerical processor the bit memory

30H

40H

51H

52H

Check for access to the I/O bus

53H

Check for overflow of the system task stacks :

Pilot task stack

SGMIN stack

Console task stack

Monitoring task stack

Background task stack

VTMT task stack

60H

61H

62H

63H

64H

65H

___________________________________________________________________________

A6/4

Description of processor self-tests A6

_______________________________________________________________________________________

Serious faults (contd)

State of lamps if a fault is encountered

RUN CPU MEM I/O

Self-tests

Contents of system word

SW60 after a fault

Check for overflow of user task stacks

Interrupt task stack

Fast task stack

Master task stack

Auxiliary task 1 stack

Auxiliary task 2 stack

Auxiliary task 3 stack

Auxiliary task 4 stack

Check on the load of the pre-processing processor

Check on the interrupt system

71H

72H

73H

74H

75H

76H

77H

80H

90H

____________________________________________________________________

A6.3-2 Blocking faults

These faults are caused by the application program, but do not entail the destruction of the memory. The CPU is stopped, and the cause of the fault is indicated by the system bits and by the system word SW61.

State of lamps if a fault is encountered

RUN CPU MEM I/O

Probable cause

Task overflow

Grafcet activity table overflow

Program stopped : Execution of a HALT command

Program fault : Execution of an unresolved JUMP

State of system

bits and system word after a fault

SY19=1

SY26=1

SW61=DEF7H

SW61=2258H

SW61=220EH

___________________________________________________________________________

A6/5

_______________________________________________________________________________________

A6.3-3 Non-blocking faults

These faults can be caused by any one of the following :

An I/O fault

The execution of an instruction

By the temporary overflow of the duration of a task cycle

Etc.

The type of fault is indicated by system bits SY16 to SY20.

. Check on the status of the I/O modules (present and configured)

The detection of a fault in a configured I/O module causes the updating of system bits

SY10, SY16, SY40 to SY47, and of the status bit I/Ox,S.

State of lamps State of if a fault is encountered Probable cause system bits after a fault

RUN CPU MEM I/O

I/O fault SY10=0

SY16=0

SY40/SY47= 0 for an I/O fault in the rack

I/Ox,S=1

. Detection of faults in the user program

These faults, caused by an instruction, result in the updating of system bits SY17 to

SY21. The testing of these bits must be done by the user program.

State of lamps State of if a fault is encountered Probable cause system bits after a fault

RUN CPU MEM I/O

Capacity exceeded SY17=1

Arithmetic error or overflow SY18=1

Task of overflow SY19=1

Index overflow SY20=1

Initialization of Grafcet SY21=1

___________________________________________________________________________

A6/6

Sveiki! Aš esu AI pokalbių robotas, specialiai apmokytas padėti jums su Schneider Electric TSX/PMX Models 40 User Guide. Aš kruopščiai peržiūrėjau dokumentą ir galiu padėti jums rasti tikslią reikiamą informaciją arba paaiškinti turinį aiškiais ir paprastais terminais. Nesvarbu, ar ieškote patarimų dėl konkrečių funkcijų, trikčių šalinimo veiksmų ar bendro naudojimo, nedvejodami užduokite savo klausimus. Kuo daugiau informacijos pateiksite apie savo rūpesčius ar poreikius, tuo tiksliau ir efektyviau galėsiu jums padėti!

Padėjėjas rašo

Padėjėjas nepasiekiamas. Bandykite dar kartą vėliau.

Turinys

Reklama